JP2024079434A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that prevents a decline in interest in gaming. [Solution] The game machine is equipped with a game control means (game control board 100) capable of controlling the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 120, image control board 140) capable of controlling the presentation, and the presentation control means may execute a suggestive presentation (special mode presentation) that suggests the possibility of entering a specific gaming state (jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and in the suggestive presentation, multiple types of specific presentations (cut-in presentation, group crossing presentation, frame lamp flash) can be executed consecutively a first specific number of times (three times), and there is a higher possibility of entering a specific gaming state when the same type of specific presentation is executed the first specific number of times than when it is executed a second specific number of times (two times), which is one less than the first specific number of times. [Selected Figure] Fig. 70

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, when a certain condition is met, such as when a gaming ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol is displayed in a varying manner. After the special symbol is displayed in a varying manner, the special symbol is displayed in a stationary manner. When a specific special symbol is displayed in a stationary manner, the machine may be controlled to a favorable gaming state that is advantageous to the player (see Patent Document 1).

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a special effect is executed that suggests the possibility of entering a favorable gaming state, and in the special effect, multiple unit effects are executed consecutively.

JP 2019-181255 A

However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of executing specific effects in which multiple unit effects are executed consecutively in order to increase the interest of players.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A game control means capable of controlling a game;
A performance control means capable of controlling the performance,
The performance control means includes:
The game control means may execute a suggestion effect that suggests that a specific game state advantageous to a controllable player may be entered,
In the suggestion performance, a plurality of types of specific performances can be executed consecutively a first specific number of times, and the specific game state is more likely to be reached when the specific performance of the same type is executed the first specific number of times than when the specific performance is executed a second specific number of times which is one less than the first specific number of times.

The present invention makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1A is a front view illustrating the standby state of the movable body, FIG. 1B is a front view illustrating the moving state of the movable body, and FIG. 1C is a front view illustrating the rotating state of the movable body. FIG. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control board. (A) is a table showing regular map-related judgment information, and (B) is a table showing special map-related judgment information. (A) is an example of the configuration of a hit determination table, (B) is an example of the configuration of a normal game fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an example of the configuration of an auxiliary game control table. 1A is an example of a jackpot determination table, FIG. 1B is an example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and FIG. 1C is an example of a reach determination table. This is an example of the configuration of a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table. This is an example of the configuration of a special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. 13 is a configuration example of a first read-ahead determination table. 13 is a configuration example of a second pre-reading determination table. 13A is an example of the configuration of a jackpot game control table, and FIG. 13B is an example of the configuration of a game status setting table. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a demo video, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image, (D) is a diagram showing an example of a special bonus background image, and (E) is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving background image. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a big win opening presentation, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a round presentation, and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing an example of a big win ending presentation. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a performance pattern, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a performance pattern display area. This is a diagram showing an example of a special chart change presentation when there is no reach and it is a miss. This is a diagram showing an example of the special chart change performance from the start to the reach. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an N reach. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an L reach. This is a diagram showing an example of an L reach, which is a continuation of Figure 23. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an SP reach. This is a diagram showing an example of an SP reach, which is a continuation of Figure 25. This is a diagram showing an example of an SP reach, which is a continuation of Figure 26. A figure showing an example of a movable object presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operation presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a hold presentation. A figure showing an example of a hold change notice. A figure showing an example of a hold change notice. 13 is a flowchart of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart of the game control side timer interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. 36 is a flowchart of the sensor detection process, which is a continuation of FIG. 35 . 13 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a special action process. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation pattern determination process. 13 is a flowchart of special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of a main process for performance control. 13 is a flowchart of a 1 ms timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 47 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process, which is a continuation of FIG. 46. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table in a non-time-saving state in the first embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram explaining the timing of execution of various director's effects and the timing of execution of premonition effects. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a premonition effect. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first specific performance. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the second specific performance. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third specific performance (L). An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third special performance (SP). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SPSP reach (L). FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SPSP reach (SP). FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a specific effect determination table. (A) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of the first premonition execution timing determination table when the director's performance is executed twice in the special chart changing performance, and (B) is a figure showing an example of the configuration of the first premonition execution timing determination table when the director's performance is executed once in the special chart changing performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a premonition effect determination table. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a second precursor execution timing determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative image, hold display area, and an overview of the display area in normal mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative image, hold display area, and display area in normal mode in detail. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative image, pending display area, and an overview of the display area in the first movement mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative image, pending display area, and display area in detail in the first movement mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative image, pending display area, and an overview of the display area in the second movement mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative image, pending display area, and display area in detail in the second movement mode. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a holding position movement notice determination table. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a hold change notice judgment table. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a hold change notice judgment table. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a hold change notice judgment table. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a reservation change timing determination table. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of hold position movement notice and hold change notice. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of hold position movement notice and hold change notice. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of hold position movement notice and hold change notice. 13 is a presentation flow relating to special mode presentation. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a special mode effect execution determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a chance-up scenario determination table. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a chance-up type pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a chance-up type pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a general performance mode determination table. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a special mode effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a special mode effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a special mode effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a special mode effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a special mode effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a special mode effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a special mode effect. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control board in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a non-play custom operation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a non-play custom operation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a non-play custom operation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a non-play custom operation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating specific examples of in-game custom operations. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating specific examples of in-game custom operations. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating specific examples of in-game custom operations. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating specific examples of in-game custom operations. A front view of a game board related to the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball has entered the second large winning port 15. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board according to the fifth embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control board in the fifth embodiment. (A) is an example of the configuration of a jackpot determination table related to the fifth embodiment, (B) is an example of the configuration of a jackpot pattern type determination table related to the fifth embodiment, and (C) is an example of the configuration of a small jackpot pattern type determination table related to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table according to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a configuration example of a small win game control table according to the fifth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the flow of a small win game. This figure shows an example of the configuration of a game status setting table, which indicates the relationship between the type of special pattern (special pattern type) that triggers a jackpot game, the game state to which the player transitions upon the end of the jackpot game corresponding to that special pattern type, and the end conditions related to the game state. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a time-saving special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table relating to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time presentation.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characteristic parts of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the drawings, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and duplicated descriptions of the same parts will be omitted as a rule. In the following, for the sake of simplicity of description, by writing a symbol or code referring to information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc., the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. corresponding to the symbol or code may be omitted or abbreviated.

1. Mechanical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The following describes the pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 4. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY refer to the left, right, up and down directions (as viewed from the front) of a player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY. In addition, the "front" will be described as the direction approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY from the pachinko gaming machine PY, and the "rear" will be described as the direction approaching the pachinko gaming machine PY from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY comprises a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 that houses the game board unit YU inside. The game machine frame 2 comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 21 that is fixed to an amusement facility, an inner frame 22 that is attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front door 23 that is supported by the inner frame 22 so as to be freely rotatable.

The outer frame 21, inner frame 22, and front door 23 have roughly the same outer peripheral shape when viewed from the front. The inner frame 22 is attached to the front of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 has a frame-shaped front frame 23m with a large opening of a substantially vertically elongated rectangle formed in the center, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU faces the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate and is formed into a substantially vertically elongated rectangle. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in a game arcade, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY can see the game area 6 formed on the front of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. Note that a transparent glass plate may be used as the transparent plate 23t instead of a transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient that the game area 6 can be seen through the transparent plate 23t from the front of the pachinko game machine PY.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to launch the game ball is provided at the lower right of the front of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is rotated (rotation angle) corresponds to the amount of force (launch strength) applied to the game ball to launch it. Thus, the game ball is launched with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation of the handle 72k.

In addition, the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m is provided with an upper tray 34 that protrudes significantly forward, and a lower tray 35 that is disposed directly below the upper tray 34. A first performance button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided in the center of the front side of the upper tray 34. The operating portion of the first performance button 41k that protrudes visibly from the upper surface of the upper tray 34 is formed in a semi-spherical shape. Furthermore, a supply ball storage hole 34A is formed on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper tray 34 for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. In addition, a surplus ball storage hole 35A is provided on the upper surface of the lower tray 35 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Furthermore, the upper decorative body 31, the right decorative body 32, and the left decorative body 33 are provided on the upper side, right side, and left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front of the front frame 23m, which protrude forward. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically the speaker 52L arranged on the left side and the speaker 52R arranged on the right side, are arranged side by side facing downward and spaced a certain distance apart in the left-right direction. In addition, a second performance button 42k that can be pressed downward is provided on the lower part of the right decorative body 32. The operating portion of the second performance button 42k is shaped like a rod. Furthermore, a frame lamp 53 that can emit light is provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right part of the upper tray 34, and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left part of the upper tray 34.

The positions and number of components and devices installed in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. 1. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board presentation unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. An opening 1A that is roughly circular when viewed from the front is formed in approximately the center of the game board 1.

A roughly ring-shaped center decorative body 61 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1, protruding forward along the opening 1A. In addition, on the outside of the center decorative body 61, an outer rail 62 is formed in a roughly ring shape so as to largely surround the center decorative body 61, and between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decorative body 61, a curved inner rail 63 is formed which is roughly parallel to the outer rail 62 and the center decorative body 61.

The area on the front side of the game board 1 surrounded by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, etc. forms the game area 6. In other words, the front side of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. The area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 also forms the launch area 7 through which the launched game ball can pass on its way to the game area 6.

The play area 6 is an area where game balls released by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing on the pachinko game machine PY. A large number of game nails (not shown) protrude from the play area 6. The game nails form paths that appropriately guide game balls that enter the play area 6 and flow down the play area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, and the big winning opening 14, etc.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning port 10 is formed so that game balls can enter. When a game ball enters the general winning port 10, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) are paid out as prize balls. Game balls that enter the general winning port 10 are discharged directly to the outside of the game area 6.

In addition, a first start winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration 61 in the game area 6. In the first start winning device 11D, the first start opening 11 is formed so that game balls can enter. The first start winning device 11D has a non-operational structure. Therefore, the ease with which game balls can enter the first start opening 11 remains constant (unchanging). When a game ball enters the first start opening 11, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, four) are paid out as prize balls. The game balls that enter the first start opening 11 are simply discharged outside the game area 6.

A warp section 61w is formed from the left side to the bottom end of the center decorative body 61, allowing the game ball to pass inside. The entrance to the warp section 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that enters the warp section 61w passes through the inside of the warp section 61w and exits from the exit. Near the exit of the warp section 61w, on the upper surface of the bottom end of the center decorative body 61, a stage 61s is provided on which the game ball can roll. A downward guide section 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first starting hole 11 is provided directly below this downward guide section 61y.

Directly below the first starting hole 11 in the game area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chute") 12D is provided. The electric chute 12D is formed with a second starting hole 12 that can be changed between a closed state where the game ball cannot enter and an open state where the ball can enter. The second starting hole 12 takes the closed state and the open state by an electric chute opening/closing member 12k provided on the electric chute 12D. In other words, the second starting hole 12 opens and closes by the operation of the electric chute opening/closing member 12k.

The electric chute opening/closing member 12k is an approximately L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting hole 12. The electric chute opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from a retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the play area 6. When the electric chute opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, it protrudes vertically into the play area 6, opening the second starting hole 12 to allow the ball to enter. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chute opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball, and the game ball is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting hole 12.

In this way, game balls can enter the second starting hole 12 only when the electric chute opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 12, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., two) are paid out as prize balls. Game balls that enter the second starting hole 12 are simply ejected outside the game area 6.

A gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if a game ball passes through the gate 13, no prize balls are paid out. Game balls that pass through the gate 13 simply flow down the game area 6.

A large prize winning device 14D is provided to the right of the first start winning device 11D in the game area 6, downstream of the gate 13. The large prize winning device 14D is formed with a large prize winning opening 14 that can be changed between a closed state where game balls cannot enter and an open state where game balls can enter. The large prize winning opening 14 is switched between a closed state and an open state by an AT opening/closing member 14k provided on the large prize winning device 14D. In other words, the large prize winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member consisting of a flat plate that is roughly horizontally elongated when viewed from the front, and normally closes the large prize opening 14. A horizontal rotation shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can rotate approximately 90 degrees around the rotation shaft so that the upper end falls forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, it protrudes vertically into the play area 6, and the large prize opening 14 is opened to allow balls to enter.

In this way, game balls can enter the large prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When a game ball enters the large prize opening 14, a predetermined number of game balls (in the basic embodiment, one) are paid out as prize balls. Note that the game ball that enters the large prize opening 14 is simply ejected outside the game area 6.

In addition, below the big prize device 14D in the game area 6, a guide path 64 is formed with its upper surface diagonally downward to the left, and protrudes forward from the game area 6 (the front surface of the game board 1) to guide the game ball to the second starting hole 12. Note that game balls rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting hole 12, but generally cannot enter the first starting hole 11.

The entry of game balls into the first start gate 11, the second start gate 12, the big prize gate 14, and the general prize gate 10, and the passage of game balls through the gate 13 are collectively referred to as "winning" at the first start gate 11, the second start gate 12, the big prize gate 14, the general prize gate 10, and the gate 13.

The game area 6 into which the game balls can flow can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 6A is called "left hit." On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that it flows down the right game area 6B is called "right hit."

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow when shot from the left is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game ball can flow when shot from the right is called the second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also formed by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, a player can aim to win at the first starting port 11 or the general winning port 10 by hitting the game ball from the left so that it flows down the first flow path R1. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a large winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, a player can aim to win at the gate 13, the second starting port 12, or the large winning port 14 by hitting the game ball from the right so that it flows down the second flow path R2.

In addition, at approximately the bottom of the game area 6, two outlets 19 are provided for discharging game balls that have been shot into the game area 6 but have not entered any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 6. In addition, the number of winning balls that enter each winning hole can be set appropriately.

Next, we will explain the board performance unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. The board performance unit EU is a unit made up of multiple devices that mainly perform the performance. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board performance unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display and has a display unit 50a capable of displaying 3D images. The image display device 50 is positioned a few centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board moving device 55 includes a movable board body 55k. The board moving body 55k has a horizontally long, plate-shaped lifting member 55k2 that is held horizontal, and a roughly elliptical rotating member 55k1 that is provided in the center of the lifting member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board moving body 55k is disposed between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state in which the board moving body 55k is disposed in the initial position, the lower end portion of the board moving body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is located slightly below the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. In other words, in the standby state, the board moving body 55k is disposed so that only a portion of the lower end of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and most of it is not visible (see FIG. 3(A)).

The movable platen body 55k can then move down from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and then move up from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3B). The predetermined operating position is a position where the movable platen body 55k is located approximately in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined working position can be set appropriately, and may be a position where the movable platen body 55k is located above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front.

The rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotation axis formed in the center in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 3(C)). The rotating member 55k1 can rotate when the movable plate body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, when it is held at the operating position, and when it moves from the operating position to the standby position.

The positions and number of components and devices installed on the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

Next, the displays 8 arranged to the right of the vertical center of the play area 6 formed on the front of the game board 1 (part other than the play area 6) will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special symbol 1 display 81a that variably displays the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1"), a special symbol 2 display 81b that variably displays the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2"), and a regular symbol display 82 that variably displays the regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "regular symbol"). The displays 8 also include a special symbol 1 reserved display 83a that displays the number of reserved special symbols 1, which will be described later, and a special symbol 2 reserved display 83b that displays the number of reserved special symbols 2, which will be described later.

The variable display of special chart 1 is executed when a special chart 1 lottery is held triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 11. The variable display of special chart 2 is executed when a special chart 2 lottery is held triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 12. The special chart 1 lottery and the special chart 2 lottery will be described later. In the following explanation, special chart 1 and special chart 2 are collectively referred to as "special charts", and the special chart 1 lottery and special chart 2 lottery are collectively referred to as "special chart lottery". The special chart 1 display 81a and the special chart 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as "special chart display 81". Furthermore, the special chart 1 reserve display 83a and the special chart 2 reserve display 83b are collectively referred to as "special chart reserve display 83".

The variable display of the special chart notifies the result of the special chart lottery. In the variable display of the special chart, the special chart is displayed variably and then statically. The statically displayed special chart (static special chart) is identification information that represents the result of the special chart lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. If the statically displayed special chart is a specific special chart that has been determined in advance, a jackpot game is played, which involves the opening of the jackpot opening 14.

The special chart 1 display 81a and the special chart 2 display 81b each consist of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting state of the special chart 1 display 81a and the special chart 2 display 81b represents the special chart according to the result of the special chart lottery, that is, the result of the special chart lottery. For example, if the result of the special chart lottery is a jackpot, the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left will be lit up, as in "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: unlit). This lighting state is the jackpot pattern and represents a jackpot. Also, if the result of the special chart lottery is a miss, only the rightmost LED will be lit up, as in "■■■■■■■□". This lighting state is the miss pattern and represents a miss. The lighting state of the LEDs corresponding to the result of the special chart lottery is not limited and can be set appropriately. Therefore, for example, all LEDs may be turned off as a miss pattern.

In addition, in the variable display of the special chart, the special chart is displayed for a predetermined variable time before the special chart is displayed in a stopped state. The mode of the variable display of the special chart is, for example, a mode in which each LED lights up so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (illuminated display in a specific mode), it may be set appropriately, such as all LEDs flashing at once.

However, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if the game ball enters the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, there are cases where the special chart lottery and the variable display of the special chart are not performed immediately. Specifically, this is the case when the game ball enters the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12 while the variable display of the special chart is being executed or while a jackpot game is being executed. In this case, the special chart lottery and the variable display of the special chart are put on hold based on that entry. This reserved special chart lottery and variable display of the special chart is called "special chart hold."

The special chart reserves include "special chart 1 reserve," which represents the special chart 1 lottery and the variable display of special chart 1 reserved based on winning at the first starting gate 11, and "special chart 2 reserve," which represents the special chart 2 lottery and the variable display of special chart 2 reserved based on winning at the second starting gate 12. The number of special chart 1 reserves, i.e., the number of reserved special chart 1 lotteries and variable displays of special chart 1, is displayed by the special chart 1 reserve indicator 83a. Meanwhile, the number of special chart 2 reserves, i.e., the number of reserved special chart 2 lotteries and variable displays of special chart 2, is displayed by the special chart 2 reserve indicator 83b.

It is possible to set an upper limit on the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2, or not. Furthermore, when an upper limit is set on the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2, the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2 may be the same or different. In the basic embodiment, the upper limit on the number of reserved special drawings 1 and the number of reserved special drawings 2 is set to "4".

The special chart 1 reserve indicator 83a and the special chart 2 reserve indicator 83b each consist of four LEDs, and the number of special chart 1 reserves and special chart 2 reserves is displayed by lighting the LEDs corresponding to the number of special chart 1 reserves and special chart 2 reserves. In the following, the number of special chart 1 reserves is referred to as the "special chart 1 reserve number (U1)," and the number of special chart 2 reserves is referred to as the "special chart 2 reserve number (U2)." Furthermore, the "special chart 1 reserve number" and the "special chart 2 reserve number" are collectively referred to as the "special chart reserve number." Furthermore, the "special chart 1 reserve indicator 83a" and the "special chart 2 reserve indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special chart reserve indicator 83."

The variable display of the normal map is executed when a normal map lottery is held in response to the entry of a game ball into the gate 13. The variable display of the normal map notifies the result of the normal map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the normal map is displayed statically after being displayed variably. The statically displayed normal map (static normal map) is identification information that represents the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. If the statically displayed normal map is a specific normal map that has been determined in advance, an auxiliary game is played in which the second starting hole 12 is opened.

The regular map display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the regular map display 82 represents the regular map according to the result of the regular map lottery, i.e., the result of the regular map lottery. If the result of the regular map lottery is a win, then both LEDs will ultimately light up as in "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). This lighting mode is the winning symbol and represents a win. If the result of the regular map lottery is a loss, then ultimately only the right LED will light up as in "■□". This lighting mode is the losing symbol and represents a loss. Note that the lighting mode of the LEDs corresponding to the result of the regular map lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all LEDs are off may be adopted as a losing symbol.

Before the normal map is displayed as stopped, the normal map is displayed as changing for a specified time. In a basic embodiment, the normal map is displayed as changing by both LEDs lighting up alternately. Note that the normal map display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set to flash all the LEDs at once, for example, unless each LED is displayed as stopped (lighted up in a specific manner).

2. Electrical Configuration of the Game Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine PY will be described based on Figures 5 to 7. As shown in Figure 5, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY, there are attached a game control board 100 that controls the game (game progress) that can obtain game profits, a performance control board 120 that controls the performance according to the game control by the game control board 100, an image control board 140 that controls images, a payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, and a power supply board 190 that supplies power to each board 100, 120, 140, 170.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The power supply is turned on and off by turning the power switch 191 on and off. The power supply board 190 is also provided with a RAM clear switch 192 that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 192 is for causing the gaming CPU 102 to clear (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") the game information stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the gaming control microcomputer 101 described later when the power is turned on. The RAM clear switch 192 is provided on the power supply board 190 located on the back side of this pachinko gaming machine PY. Therefore, basically, only employees of the gaming facility who can open and close the front door 23 can operate the RAM clear switch 192. In other words, the RAM clear switch 192 can be said to be an operating means that is substantially impossible for players to operate. When the RAM clear switch 192 is operated in a specific manner (for example, pressing the RAM clear switch 192 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), or pressing the RAM clear switch 192 a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times)), a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 192 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. Note that in this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 192 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 192 can be changed as appropriate, and for example, it may be provided on the game control board 100 or a dedicated board. Also, the manner of operation of the RAM clear switch 192 for clearing the RAM is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 100 is equipped with a one-chip game control microcomputer (hereinafter "game control microcomputer") 101 that controls the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. Games that can earn game profits and are subject to the control of the game control board 100 include special chart lottery, variable display of special chart, jackpot game, game state setting described below, regular chart lottery, variable display of regular chart, auxiliary game, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes the programs stored in the game ROM 103.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing the game control main processing and game control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The game ROM 103 also stores a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special symbol variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a win determination table, an auxiliary game control table, and the like, which will be described later. The game ROM 103 may be external.

The game RAM 104 is also provided with a special chart reservation memory unit 105. Here, the special chart reservation memory unit 105 will be described. As described above, when a game ball wins the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, a special chart reservation can occur. When a special chart reservation is possible, that is, when the number of special chart reservations has not reached the upper limit, judgment information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special chart lottery, etc., is obtained based on this winning. Then, this judgment information is temporarily stored in the special chart reservation memory unit 105 as a special chart reservation. In the following, the judgment information obtained by the game ball winning the first start hole 11 is referred to as "special chart 1 related judgment information", and the judgment information obtained by the game ball winning the second start hole 12 is referred to as "special chart 2 related judgment information". In addition, the special chart 1 related judgment information and the special chart 2 related judgment information are collectively referred to as "special chart related judgment information".

Then, the special drawing 1 related judgment information is stored as special drawing 1 reserved in the special drawing 1 reserved memory unit 105a in the special drawing reserved memory unit 105. On the other hand, the special drawing 2 related judgment information is stored as special drawing 2 reserved in the special drawing 2 reserved memory unit 105b in the special drawing reserved memory unit 105. The number of special drawing 1 related judgment information that can be stored in the special drawing 1 reserved memory unit 105a, i.e., the upper limit value of the special drawing 1 reserved number, is set to "4". Also, the number of special drawing 2 related judgment information that can be stored in the special drawing 2 reserved memory unit 105b, i.e., the upper limit value of the special drawing 2 reserved number, is set to "4".

In addition, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a specified relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by the various sensors are input to the game control board 100. In addition, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

The various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general prize opening sensor 10a, a first start opening sensor 11a, a second start opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a special prize opening sensor 14a.

The general prize opening sensor 10a detects game balls that have entered the general prize opening 10. The first start opening sensor 11a detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 11. The second start opening sensor 12a detects game balls that have entered the second start opening 12. The gate sensor 13a detects game balls that have passed through the gate 13. The special prize opening sensor 14a detects game balls that have entered the special prize opening 14.

The various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chute solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chute solenoid 12s drives the electric chute opening and closing member 12k of the electric chute 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening and closing member 14k of the big prize device 14D.

The type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay. The type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

Furthermore, displays 8 (special chart display 81, regular chart display 82, and special chart reserved display 83) are connected to the game control board 100. The display control of these displays 8 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

The game control board 100 also transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 170 is connected to a card unit CU and a payout device 73, as well as a launching device 72. The card unit CU is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY, and is a device that enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and loan balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The paid-out prize balls and loan balls are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting.

The launching device 72 is a device that launches game balls. The handle 72k constitutes an operation section or input section that accepts operations to cause the launching device 72 to launch game balls, and is included in the launching device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect contact with the handle 72k by a person such as a player. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal (contact detection signal) to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175. That is, when the handle 72k is touched, the touch switch 72a outputs a contact detection signal to the payout control board 170 (ON state), and when the handle 72k is not touched, it does not output a contact detection signal to the payout control board 170 (OFF state). Furthermore, a launch volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k.

The payout control board 170 can control the launching device 72, and allows the launching device 72 to launch game balls on the condition that the contact detection signal from the touch switch 72a is ON, in other words, the handle 72k is in contact with the player. Therefore, when the contact detection signal is OFF, in other words, when the handle 72k is not in contact with the player, the launching device 72 cannot launch game balls. When the launching device 72 is permitted to launch game balls, it drives the launching motor 72m so that game balls are launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the launch volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY, when the rotation of the handle 72k is maintained, one game ball is launched approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The game control board 100 also transmits various commands containing information related to the game to the presentation control board 120 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (the control content of the game) by the game control board 100 based on the various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the presentation control board 120 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be sent from the game control board 100 to the presentation control board 120. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (not shown, for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the game control board 100 and the presentation control board 120 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The performance control board 120 can be positioned as a performance control unit that controls the performance together with the image control board 140, the sound control circuit 161, and the sub-drive board 162 described below. However, it is sufficient that the performance control unit is equipped with at least the performance control board 120 and is capable of controlling game performances, customer waiting performances, and operation promotion performances using the performance devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.).

The effects that are controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special chart change effects, hold effects, big win game effects, etc.), customer waiting effects, and operation promotion effects that encourage operation during the period when operation of the first effect button 41k or the second effect button 42k is valid (operation valid period).

The presentation control microcomputer 121 includes a presentation ROM 123 that stores programs and the like for controlling presentations as the game progresses using the game control board 100, a presentation RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and a presentation CPU 122 that executes the programs stored in the presentation ROM 123.

The performance ROM 123 stores programs for performing the performance control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, and 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be external.

The performance RAM 124 includes a start winning command pending memory section 125 that stores the start winning command described below, a pattern designation command memory section 126 that stores the pattern designation command described below, and a special pattern change start command memory section 127 that stores the special pattern change start command described below.

An image control board 140 is also connected to the presentation control board 120. The presentation control microcomputer 121 of the presentation control board 120 causes the image control board 140 to control the display of the image display device 50 based on commands received from the game control board 100, i.e., according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. The connection between the presentation control board 120 and the image control board 140 is a two-way communication connection that allows both the transmission of signals from the presentation control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the presentation control board 120.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 that is used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) 146 that is used for expanding the image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or part of these electronic components may be configured on a single chip.

CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically image data of characters, items, designs, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance designs), background images, etc.) for displaying images to be displayed on image display device 50.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and displays it in the display area in the VRAM 146 according to a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. The VDP 144 then appropriately synthesizes the displayed image data to draw an image in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various performance images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

The display list is made up of a set of commands that instruct the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains various parameter information such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is to be drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the transparency of the image.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 based on commands received from the game control board 100, i.e., according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100.

Audio data such as the sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. The sound control circuit 161 may be configured as a board and a CPU may be mounted on it. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute the sound control. In this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and the sound data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 52 may also be connected to the image control board 140 and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be made to execute the sound control. In this case, the sound data may also be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

In addition, various sensors that serve as input units and various actuators that serve as drive sources are connected to the performance control board 120 via a specified relay board (not shown). Signals output by the various sensors are input to the performance control board 120. In addition, the performance control board 120 outputs signals to the various actuators.

The various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a first performance button sensor 41a and a second performance button sensor 42a. The first performance button sensor 41a detects that the first performance button 41k has been pressed. The second performance button sensor 42a detects that the second performance button 42k has been pressed. When the first performance button sensor 41a and the second performance button sensor 42a detect that they have been operated, they output a signal to the performance control board 120 according to the detection content.

The type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay. Also, the type and number of actuators connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

The various actuators connected to the performance control board 120 include a motor 55m1 for rotating the movable board body, and a motor 55m2 for lifting and lowering the movable board body. The motor 55m1 for rotating the movable board body drives the rotating member 55k1, and is capable of rotating the rotating member 55k1. The motor 55m2 for lifting and lowering the movable board body is capable of lifting and lowering the lifting member 55k2. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operating modes of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162.

In the following, the operations of the "rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as the "operation of the movable plate body 55k." Rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the lifting member 55k2 may also be referred to as "rotating, lowering or raising the movable plate body 55k."

The performance control microcomputer 121 also controls the lighting of the frame lamps 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light pattern data (data that determines the on/off state, light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamps 53, and controls the light emission of the frame lamps 53 according to the light pattern data. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light pattern data.

The sub-drive board 162 may be constructed as a board and have a CPU mounted on it. In this case, the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the frame lamps 53 and the like, and to control the operation of the movable board body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and data relating to the light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

3. Main Games Played by the Gaming Machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS.

3-1. Games related to normal figures First, games related to normal figures will be explained. When the launched game ball passes through the gate 13, the pachinko game machine PY can execute a normal figure lottery. When the normal figure lottery is executed, the normal figure display 82 performs a variable display of the normal figure (a variable display followed by a stationary display). Here, the stationary display of the normal figure includes a winning figure and a losing figure. The losing figure of the normal figure is also called a "losing normal figure" to distinguish it from the losing figure of the special figure described later.

When a winning symbol is displayed, an auxiliary game is executed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 is ended. On the other hand, when a losing regular symbol is displayed, an auxiliary game is not executed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 is ended. In the following, when the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the regular symbol is not being displayed or an auxiliary game is not being executed, it is referred to as "the regular symbol variation start condition being met."

The pachinko gaming machine PY can carry out a series of games such as variable display of normal symbols and auxiliary games based on the normal symbol variation start condition being met, acquiring normal symbol related judgment information, and conducting a normal symbol lottery. The acquired normal symbol related judgment information includes a normal symbol random number, as shown in FIG. 8 (A). The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a win judgment. An appropriate range is set for each random number.

3-1-1. Hit Determination Hit determination is a determination for determining whether or not a hit has occurred (whether or not an auxiliary game is executed) using a hit determination table such as that shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a game state, which will be described later. When associated with a game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in a non-time-saving state (non-time-saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in a time-saving state (time-saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, the normal symbol random number determination value (normal symbol random number determination value) is appropriately allocated to the hit and miss results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a miss. If the hit determination result is a hit, a winning symbol is displayed as a static display on the variable display of the normal symbol. On the other hand, if the hit determination result is a miss, a missing normal symbol is displayed as a static display on the variable display of the normal symbol. The probability of winning a hit can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal map fluctuation pattern determination/normal map variable display Normal map fluctuation pattern determination is a judgment to determine the normal map fluctuation pattern using a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table such as that shown in Figure 9 (B). The normal map fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined items related to the variable display of the normal map, such as the normal map fluctuation time.

The normal map fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state), the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table includes a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table) and a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table).

Each normal map fluctuation pattern determination table stores one normal map fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination, for each normal map that is stopped. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY can make the normal map fluctuation time different between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. For example, in the non-time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal map when a losing normal map (losing normal map) is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined, and for the variable display of the normal map when a winning pattern is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of 30 seconds is determined. Also, in the time-saving state, for the variable display of the normal map when a losing normal map is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined, and for the variable display of the normal map when a winning pattern is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined. Note that these normal map fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, the variable display of the normal map for the normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the normal map display 82. In this way, a hit determination and a normal map fluctuation pattern determination are performed, and thus the variable display of the normal map is performed on the normal map display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game Auxiliary game is executed when a winning symbol is displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a lottery) in the variable display of the normal symbol. In the auxiliary game, the electric chute 12D opens.

The elements that make up the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chute 12D opens and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko game machine PY controls the auxiliary game using an auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores the auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. In other words, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game components with the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). Note that the specific content of each element, such as the number of times it opens and the opening time, can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can set different opening times for the electric chute 12D for auxiliary play in the non-time-saving state and auxiliary play in the time-saving state. For example, in auxiliary play in the non-time-saving state, the electric chute 12D opens for a first opening time, such as 0.2 seconds, during which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the electric chute 12D. On the other hand, in auxiliary play in the time-saving state, the electric chute 12D opens for a second opening time, which is longer than the first opening time, such as two openings of 2.5 seconds with a 1.0 second interval (closing) between them, during which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the electric chute 12D.

In the following, auxiliary games in a non-time-saving state are also referred to as "short-open auxiliary games." On the other hand, auxiliary games in a time-saving state are also referred to as "long-open auxiliary games." The opening time for each auxiliary game is the total time for that auxiliary game, and it may be configured to open multiple times during one auxiliary game, for example, by opening once, closing for an interval, and then opening again.

3-2. Games related to special figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. When the launched game ball enters the first starting hole 11, the pachinko game machine PY can execute a special figure 1 lottery. When the special figure 1 lottery is executed, the special figure 1 display 81a performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (a variable display followed by a stationary display) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the stationary display of the special figure 1 includes a jackpot pattern and a losing pattern. In other words, the results of the special figure 1 lottery include a jackpot and a losing pattern.

When a jackpot symbol is displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on that winning is ended. Also, when a losing symbol is displayed, the jackpot game is not executed, and the game based on that winning is ended.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY can execute a special chart 2 lottery when a released game ball enters the second starting hole 12. When the special chart 2 lottery is executed, the special chart 2 display 81b performs a variable display of the special chart 2 (a variable display followed by a stationary display) to notify the result of the special chart 2 lottery. Here, the stationary display of the special chart 2 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. In other words, the results of the special chart 2 lottery include a jackpot and a losing symbol.

When a jackpot symbol is displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on that winning is ended. Furthermore, when a losing symbol is displayed, the jackpot game is not executed, and the game based on that winning is ended.

In the following, the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 11 is referred to as the "fulfillment of the first start condition," and the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 12 is referred to as the "fulfillment of the second start condition." Furthermore, the "fulfillment of the first start condition" and the "fulfillment of the second start condition" are collectively referred to as the "fulfillment of the start condition." Furthermore, the losing special symbol is also referred to as the "losing special symbol" to distinguish it from the losing regular symbols described above.

When the start conditions are met, the pachinko game machine PY acquires special chart-related judgment information and performs a special chart lottery, and then performs a series of games such as variable display of special charts and jackpot games. In order to perform variable display of special charts, various judgments are made regarding the special chart-related judgment information. The acquired special chart-related judgment information includes special chart random numbers, jackpot chart type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special chart change pattern random numbers, as shown in FIG. 8(B).

The special pattern random number is a random number (determination information) used to determine a jackpot. The jackpot pattern type random number is a random number (determination information) used to determine the type of jackpot pattern. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) used to determine a reach. The special pattern change pattern random number is a random number (determination information) used to determine the change pattern of the special pattern. An appropriate range is set for each random number. Next, we will explain each determination made using the special pattern related determination information.

3-2-1. Jackpot Determination Jackpot determination is to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached (whether or not a jackpot game is executed), in other words, whether or not it is a jackpot or a miss, using a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table can be provided in association with a game state described later, for example, as shown in FIG. 10(A). Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as a "normal probability jackpot determination table"), and a jackpot determination table used in a high probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as a "high probability jackpot determination table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with a game state, a special symbol random number determination value (special symbol random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot and miss results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY checks the acquired special symbol random number against the jackpot determination table associated with the game state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a miss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

The method of allocating special pattern random number judgment values to the jackpot probability and the results of various jackpot judgments can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination is to determine the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table such as that shown in Fig. 10(B) when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the components of the jackpot (contents advantageous to the player) that are composed of the game benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is associated with the type of special symbol (special symbol 1/special symbol 2) that is variably displayed, in other words, the type of start port (first start port 11/second start port 12) from which the winning combination that caused the jackpot symbol type determination (that generated the jackpot symbol type determination) occurred. That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variably displayed special symbol 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variably displayed special symbol 2.

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a determination value of the jackpot symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY checks the acquired jackpot symbol type random number against the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination value is appropriately assigned to various jackpot symbols.

The types of the jackpot patterns of the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 can be set as appropriate, but for example, as shown in the jackpot pattern type determination table in FIG. 10(B), three types of jackpot patterns, jackpot pattern A, jackpot pattern B, and jackpot pattern C, can be set as the jackpot patterns of the special chart 1, and three types of jackpot patterns, jackpot pattern D, jackpot pattern E, and jackpot pattern F, can be set as the jackpot patterns of the special chart 2. And, as shown in the jackpot pattern type determination table in FIG. 10(B), in the first jackpot pattern type determination table and the second jackpot pattern type determination table, the jackpot pattern type random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot patterns. The distribution rate of the jackpot pattern type can be changed as appropriate. Also, the types of jackpot patterns can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

Reach judgment is, for example, when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss, using a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. 10 (C), to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the special chart variation performance described later.

The reach determination table can be associated with the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). When associated with the game state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving reach determination table).

In each reach judgment table, the reach random number judgment value (reach random number judgment value) is assigned to the reach judgment result of "reach (reach will occur)" or "not reach (reach will not occur)". Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY compares the acquired reach random number with the reach judgment table to judge whether or not there is a reach (whether or not a reach will occur).

As shown in FIG. 10(C), it is possible to make the number of reach random number judgment values that are judged as "reach in hand (reach occurs)" different between the non-time-saving reach judgment table and the time-saving reach judgment table. Note that in the following, the result of a reach judgment that is made on the assumption that the result of the jackpot judgment is a "miss", which is "reach in hand (reach occurs)", is sometimes referred to as a "reach with miss", and "no reach (no reach occurs)" is sometimes referred to as a "no reach miss". Furthermore, a "no reach miss" is sometimes referred to as a "complete miss", and a "reach with miss" is sometimes referred to as a "reach miss".

3-2-4. Special pattern variation pattern determination The special pattern variation pattern determination is to determine the variation pattern (special pattern variation pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern, for example, by using a special pattern variation pattern determination table (special pattern variation pattern determination table) as shown in Figs. 11 to 12, whether the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or a miss.

The special chart change pattern is identification information for identifying specific items such as the special chart change time, the so-called "length," and the presentation flow (presentation content) of the special chart change presentation described below. Note that the special chart change pattern can also include identification information regarding the results of the jackpot determination and the reach determination, in addition to the special chart change time and the presentation flow (presentation content) of the special chart change presentation. Note that the type and number of special chart change patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern variation pattern judgment table can be associated with the type of special pattern (special pattern 1/special pattern 2) that performs the variable display that is the subject of the judgment, in other words, the type of start port (first start port 11/second start port 12) from which the winning that is the result of the special pattern variation pattern judgment was made. That is, the special pattern variation pattern judgment table includes a special pattern variation pattern judgment table (special pattern 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) that is used when performing the variable display of special pattern 1, and a special pattern variation pattern judgment table (special pattern 2 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 12) that is used when performing the variable display of special pattern 2.

And each special chart fluctuation pattern judgment table can be associated with a game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). Specifically, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table includes a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the non-time-saving state (special chart 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for non-time-saving) and a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the time-saving state (special chart 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for time-saving). On the other hand, the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table also includes a special chart 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the non-time-saving state (special chart 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for non-time-saving) and a special chart 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the time-saving state (special chart 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for time-saving).

In addition, each special chart fluctuation pattern determination table associated with a game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state) can also be associated with a jackpot determination result and a reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time-saving special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table each have a jackpot, a reach and miss, and a no-reach miss. Similarly, the non-time-saving special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time-saving special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table each have a jackpot, a reach and miss, and a no-reach miss.

Furthermore, the special chart 1 variation pattern judgment table for each no-reach miss associated with the game state can also be associated with the special chart 1 reserved number. For example, there is a special chart 1 variation pattern judgment table for no-reach miss used when the special chart 1 reserved number (U1) is 0 to 2, and a special chart 1 variation pattern judgment table for no-reach miss used when the special chart 1 reserved number (U1) is 3 to 4. Similarly, the special chart 2 variation pattern judgment table for each no-reach miss associated with the game state can also be associated with the special chart 2 reserved number. Specifically, there is a special chart 2 variation pattern judgment table for no-reach miss used when the special chart 2 reserved number (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special chart 2 variation pattern judgment table for no-reach miss used when the special chart 2 reserved number (U2) is 3 to 4.

Then, the special chart display 81 displays the special chart change for the special chart change time according to the special chart change pattern determined by each special chart change pattern judgment. After the special chart change display, if the jackpot pattern is displayed as a static display of the special chart change display result (the result of the special chart lottery), the next special chart change display is not performed immediately, and the jackpot game is played.

It is also possible to associate each special chart variation pattern with a special chart variation presentation flow as shown in the third column from the right in the table of Figures 11 and 12. Here, we will explain typical presentations that make up the presentation flow of the special chart variation presentation associated with the special chart variation pattern.

The effects that make up the presentation flow of special chart change effects include normal changes, reaches, normal reaches (N reaches), long reaches (L reaches), special reaches (SP reaches), and battle effects.

Normal variation is when the statically displayed performance symbols start to change, and each of the performance symbols changes so quickly that it is difficult to recognize them one by one, suggesting that the variable display of the special symbol has begun. The special symbol change performance related to a no-reach miss change (the part from when the performance symbols start to change until they stop changing), and the part of the special symbol change performance in which a reach occurs until the reach is established (confirmed) may be composed of normal variation.

N reach is an effect in which, immediately after a reach is established (confirmed) after normal fluctuations, the effect symbols that make up the reach are temporarily stopped and maintained in that position for a specified period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), while the remaining effect symbol decelerates and fluctuates at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The expected probability of a jackpot suggested by an N reach is higher than normal fluctuations, but lower than an L reach and an SP reach, which will be described later. If the special chart fluctuation effect ends with an N reach, the remaining effect symbol that fluctuates at that slower speed stops. In the case of a miss, the remaining effect symbol stops at a different effect symbol from the effect symbols that make up the reach. If the special chart fluctuation effect does not end with an N reach, the remaining effect symbol fluctuates again at high speed, and the reach is maintained and the N reach develops (switches) into an L reach or an SP reach.

The L reach can be executed both in the case of a big win and in the case of a miss, and is an effect that indicates whether or not a big win game state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a big win game state. Furthermore, the L reach is an effect that can be executed after, for example, an N reach, and is executed for a longer period of time than an N reach, suggesting a higher expectation of a big win than an N reach. In the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect patterns that constitute the reach are reduced in size and moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image compared to the N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is at the top left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect pattern EZ3 is at the top right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the L reach-specific background image (an image dedicated to the L reach is displayed). In the L reach, an animation image using 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As for the effect content of the L reach, an image of a scene different from the match related to the SP reach described later, such as the main character training to learn a special move, is displayed.

The SP reach can be executed both when there is a jackpot and when there is a miss, and is an effect that indicates whether or not a jackpot game state will be reached, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state being reached. Furthermore, the SP reach is an effect that can be executed after, for example, an N reach, and is executed for a longer period of time than an L reach, suggesting a higher probability of a jackpot than an L reach. In the SP reach, the reached reach that has been established is maintained, but the effect patterns that constitute the reach are reduced and moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image compared to the N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is at the top left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect pattern EZ3 is at the top right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to a dedicated SP reach image (a video dedicated to the SP reach is played). In the SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. And, as the content of the SP reach effect, a video of a scene in which the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the main character's rival belongs play a game is displayed.

Battle effects are effects that can be executed after a reach during time-saving mode, for example, and are effects that suggest a higher probability of a jackpot than normal fluctuations. In battle effects, the reach that has been achieved is maintained, but the effect patterns that make up the reach are reduced in size and moved to a specified position (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 is at the top left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect pattern EZ3 is at the top right of the display unit 50a), and the background image switches to one that is dedicated to battle effects (videos dedicated to battle effects are played). In addition, in battle effects, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display unit 50a.

Note that the "reach is maintained" in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performances does not only include a state in which the performance symbols constituting the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance are visible on the display unit 50a, but also includes a state in which the performance symbols constituting the reach are difficult or impossible to see from the display unit 50a for a specified period of time in relation to a dedicated background image, for example. Also, the performance contents of the normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performances can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the performances that make up the special chart variation performance are not limited to these, and can be added or removed as appropriate.

Also, as shown in the second column from the right in the tables of Figures 11 and 12, it is possible to give names to special chart variation patterns by associating them with the results of the jackpot determination and the content of the special chart variation presentation. Special chart variation patterns related to jackpots are sometimes collectively referred to as "jackpot variations," and special chart variation patterns related to losses are sometimes collectively referred to as "loss variations."

Furthermore, a special chart variation pattern in which an SP reach is made regardless of the result of the jackpot determination is sometimes collectively referred to as an "SP reach variation," a special chart variation pattern in which an L reach is made is sometimes collectively referred to as an "L reach variation," and a special chart variation pattern in which the special chart variation performance ends with an N reach is sometimes collectively referred to as an "N reach variation." Also, a miss variation with a reach is sometimes collectively referred to as a "miss variation with reach," and a miss variation without a reach is sometimes collectively referred to as a "normal miss variation."

3-2-5. Pre-reading judgment Before making a jackpot judgment, the pachinko game machine PY can make a pre-reading judgment using, for example, a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIG. 13 to FIG. 14 based on the acquired special chart related judgment information. The pre-reading judgment table can be associated with the type of start port (first start port 11/second start port 12) related to the start winning, in other words, the type of special chart (special chart 1/special chart 2) that is variably displayed by the start winning. That is, the pre-reading judgment table includes a first pre-reading judgment table (FIG. 13) when the first start port 11 is won and the special chart 1 is variably displayed, and a second pre-reading judgment table (FIG. 14) when the second start port 12 is won and the special chart 2 is variably displayed. Note that the pre-reading judgment based on the first pre-reading judgment table is also called the "first pre-reading judgment", and the pre-reading judgment based on the second pre-reading judgment table is also called the "second pre-reading judgment".

The look-ahead judgment table can also be associated with the game states (normal game state/high probability high base game state/low probability high base game state) described below. That is, there are look-ahead judgment tables: a look-ahead judgment table used in the normal game state (look-ahead judgment table for normal game state), a look-ahead judgment table used in the high probability high base game state (look-ahead judgment table for high probability high base game state), and a look-ahead judgment table used in the low probability high base game state (look-ahead judgment table for low probability high base game state).

In other words, the look-ahead judgment tables include a first look-ahead judgment table used in a normal game state, a first look-ahead judgment table used in a high-probability high-base game state, a first look-ahead judgment table used in a low-probability high-base game state, a second look-ahead judgment table used in a normal game state, a second look-ahead judgment table used in a high-probability high-base game state, and a second look-ahead judgment table used in a low-probability high-base game state.

The special chart change pattern related to the variable display of the special chart that is performed in response to a winning entry into the starting hole 11, 12 is identified by the look-ahead judgment using the look-ahead judgment table shown in Figures 13 to 14. In other words, the special chart change pattern related to the variable display of the special chart is identified as the look-ahead judgment result before the variable display of the special chart based on the winning entry is performed. In the process of identifying the special chart change pattern, the win or loss of the jackpot is also identified as the look-ahead judgment result.

The result of the look-ahead judgment, which includes information on the special symbol variation pattern and the like, is associated with the start winning command. As described below, the start winning command is transmitted to the performance control board 120 as a look-ahead judgment result when it is generated. Note that the type of information to be identified as the look-ahead judgment result can be changed as appropriate. For example, information on the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the look-ahead judgment result.

As described above, the special chart display 81 performs variable display of the special chart by performing the jackpot determination, jackpot pattern type determination, reach determination, and special chart change pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot pattern is displayed as a stopped jackpot pattern as the display result (the result of the special chart lottery) in the variable display of the special chart, the next variable display of the special chart is not performed, and the jackpot game is executed next. Next, the jackpot game will be explained.

The jackpot game includes multiple rounds of play accompanied by the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round of play, and an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the final round of play until the end of the jackpot game. Each round of play starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round of play, and ends with the start of the next round of play or the start of the ending.

It is possible not to provide an OP or ED. In the following, a predetermined number of rounds (predetermined order) will simply be referred to as a "round." For example, the first round will be referred to as "1st round (1R)," and the tenth round will be referred to as "10th round (10R)."

The pachinko game machine PY controls the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. In other words, it is possible to associate a jackpot game with a type of jackpot symbol. One type or multiple types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores the elements that make up a jackpot game (jackpot game components). The jackpot game components include the number of rounds of play, the number of times the jackpot opening 14 is opened in each round of play, the type of jackpot opening and the opening time (opening pattern) for each opening, the time the opening is closed until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time).

The pachinko game machine PY can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table such as that shown in FIG. 15(A). That is, it is possible to set the types of jackpot games and the jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot games set in FIG. 15(A) will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot pattern A (hereinafter also referred to as the "first jackpot game"), 10 rounds of play are played. In each round of play from 1R to 10R, the jackpot opening 14 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game until the start of the first round of play. In addition, there is an ending in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round of play until the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot pattern B (hereinafter also referred to as the "second jackpot game"), five rounds of play are played. In each round of play from round 1 to round 5, the jackpot opening 14 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game until the start of the first round of play. In addition, there is an ending in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round of play until the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as the "third jackpot game"), five rounds of play are played. In each round of play from 1R to 5R, the jackpot opening 14 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game until the start of the first round of play. In addition, there is an ending in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the final round of play until the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as the "fourth jackpot game"), ten rounds of play are played. In each round of play from 1R to 10R, the jackpot opening 14 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game until the start of the first round of play. In addition, there is an ending in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the final round of play until the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as the "5th jackpot game"), six rounds of play are played. In each round of play from 1R to 6R, the jackpot opening 14 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the 5th jackpot game until the start of the first round of play. In addition, there is an ending in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the final round of play until the end of the 5th jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as the "sixth jackpot game"), six rounds of play are played. In each round of play from 1R to 6R, the jackpot opening 14 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game until the start of the first round of play. In addition, there is an ending in which the jackpot opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the final round of play until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In each round of play, when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) are detected by the big prize opening sensor 14a, the big prize opening 14 is closed and the round of play ends even before the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 14 has elapsed. In addition, the type and specific content of the big prize game components can be changed as appropriate.

In the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), the type of jackpot game to be played is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game may be played in a different way. For example, a device capable of allocating to two winning slots may be provided in the game area 6, and when one winning slot is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of rounds is played, while when the other winning slot is won, either a jackpot game consisting of more than the predetermined number of rounds or a jackpot game consisting of fewer than the predetermined number of rounds is played with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game states Next, the game states that the pachinko game machine PY can control will be described. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being played, and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being played. The non-jackpot game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The elements that are "advantageous to the player" in the specific game state include the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second start hole 12. In other words, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second start hole 12 can be associated with the specific game state.

When the probability of winning a jackpot is favorable to the player, this means that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in normal gameplay, making it easier to win a jackpot. Also, when the ease of opening the second starting hole 12 is favorable to the player, this means that the ease of opening the second starting hole 12 is higher than in normal gameplay, making the opening time of the second starting hole 12 longer per unit time.

The specific game states can be set to three types: a first specific game state in which both the probability of a jackpot and the opening time per unit time of the second start port 12 are advantageous to the player; a second specific game state in which only the probability of a jackpot is advantageous to the player; and a third specific game state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second start port 12 is advantageous to the player. Note that it is also possible to install only some of the three specific game states in the pachinko game machine PY, rather than installing all three of these specific game states.

Here, as a partial gaming state that focuses on the probability of a jackpot, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in a normal gaming state and is favorable to the player in terms of the probability of a jackpot is called a "high probability state." In contrast, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is the normal probability in a normal gaming state and is not favorable to the player in terms of the probability of a jackpot is called a "normal probability state."

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting hole 12 per unit time, a state in which the opening time of the second starting hole 12 per unit time is longer than in the normal game state and the ease of opening the second starting hole 12 is advantageous to the player is called a "time-saving state." In contrast, a state in which the opening time of the second starting hole 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal game state and the ease of opening the second starting hole 12 is not advantageous to the player is called a "non-time-saving state."

Here, we will explain in detail about the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. As mentioned above, in the time-saving state, the electric chute 12D is open for a longer period of time per unit time compared to the non-time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, it is easier to win at the second starting hole 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Here, we will explain a specific method for making it easier to win at the second starting hole 12 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state.

For example, by making the time-saving state a state in which the normal map change time is more likely to be shorter than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win at the second starting hole 12 in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, regardless of the result of the winning judgment, in the time-saving state, a normal map change time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal map change time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time-saving state is determined. As a result, the number of times the normal map lottery is executed per unit time is greater in the time-saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the winning judgment and the opening time of the electric chute 12D in one auxiliary play are the same, the opening time of the electric chute 12D per unit time will be longer by the amount of the number of times the normal map lottery is executed per unit time.

In addition, by making the time that the electric chute 12D is open for a longer period of time in one auxiliary play in the time-saving state compared to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win in the second starting hole 12 in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the electric chute 12D is open for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary play, whereas in the time-saving state, the electric chute 12D is open for a total of 5.0 seconds in one auxiliary play. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal chart fluctuation time are the same, the number of times auxiliary play is performed per unit time will be the same, so the opening time of the electric chute 12D per unit time will be longer by the amount that the opening time of the electric chute 12D in one auxiliary play is longer.

Furthermore, by making the time-saving state a state in which a hit is more likely to be determined in a hit judgment than the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win in the second starting hole 12 in the time-saving state. For example, as described above, in the non-time-saving state, the hit judgment has a probability of 6600/65536, whereas in the time-saving state, the hit judgment has a probability of 59936/65536. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chute 12D and the normal chart fluctuation time in one auxiliary play are the same, the probability of a hit being determined in the hit judgment is higher, so the number of hit judgments per unit time increases, and the opening time of the electric chute 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In this way, by satisfying the three conditions that it is easier to win a jackpot in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, that the normal chart fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter, and that the open time of the electric chute 12D during one auxiliary play is more likely to be longer, in the time-saving state, the open time of the electric chute 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier to win a jackpot in the second starting hole 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of balls fired, becomes higher. Therefore, in the time-saving state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal play state. In other words, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

In the time-saving state, it is also acceptable for only some of the three conditions for the second starting hole 12 to be open for a longer time per unit time to be met, rather than for all of them to be met. Ultimately, in the time-saving state, the electric chute 12D is open for a longer time per unit time compared to the non-time-saving state, so that it is easier to win at the second starting hole 12.

In addition, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier to select a special chart change pattern with a shorter special chart change time than in the non-time-saving state, so that the number of times the special chart variable display is executed per unit time is reduced or the average special chart change time is lower. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which reserved special charts are consumed is faster, making it easier for valid winnings at the starting hole (winnings that can be stored as reserved special charts) to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a jackpot while playing smoothly.

In the following, the first specific game state will be referred to as the "high probability high base game state," the second specific game state as the "high probability low base game state," and the third specific game state as the "low probability high base game state," in relation to the advantageous nature of each specific game state for the player. Furthermore, the normal game state will be referred to as the "low probability low base game state."

Therefore, the low-probability, low-base game state can be said to be a game state controlled by the normal probability state and the non-time-saving state. Similarly, the low-probability, high-base game state can be said to be a game state controlled by the normal probability state and the time-saving state, the high-probability, low-base game state can be said to be a game state controlled by the high-probability state and the non-time-saving state, and the high-probability, high-base game state can be said to be a game state controlled by the high-probability state and the time-saving state.

In this way, the pachinko game machine PY can be controlled in a low probability low base game state, a low probability high base game state, a high probability low base game state, a high probability high base game state, and a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the big prize opening 14 is open for a long period of time, and a large number of game balls can be obtained, so the jackpot game state can also be said to be an advantageous game state for the player. Therefore, the jackpot game state and the specific game state can also be said to be "advantageous game states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The high probability high base game state and the high probability low base game state are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base game state in that the probability of a jackpot is higher than in the normal probability state. The high probability high base game state and the low probability high base game state are also game states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base game state in that the ease of winning in the second start port 12 is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the large winning port 14, which opens with more winning balls per winning than the first start port 11 and the second start port 12, opens, so the jackpot game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base game state.

When the power supply of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is set first. The jackpot game state is set when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the specific game state is set when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed. Next, the setting of the specific game state will be explained.

3-5. Setting of a specific game state The pachinko game machine PY can set a new specific game state when a jackpot game ends. In other words, after a jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in the specific game state. The duration of this specific game state can be set appropriately. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. In addition, the duration for which the specific game state can continue can also be limited.

When limiting the duration of a specific game state, the specific game state can be ended when an end condition for the duration is met. Then, when the specific game state ends, a normal game state can be set. Also, for a high-probability, high-base game state, when an end condition is met, a low-probability, high-base game state or a high-probability, low-base game state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability, high-base game state or high-probability, low-base game state may be continued until the next big win is won. Also, the same or different end condition may be set for the newly set low-probability, high-base game state or high-probability, low-base game state, and when the end condition is met, a normal game state may be set.

In addition, the termination conditions for the duration of the specific game state can be set appropriately. For example, the number of times the special chart variable display is executed can be set as the termination condition. Furthermore, the termination conditions are not limited to the number of times the special chart variable display is executed, but can also be the time elapsed after a jackpot game, the number of game balls released after a jackpot game, the number of times passing through gate 13 after a jackpot game, or the derivation of the result of a lottery to determine whether or not to terminate the specific game state (the so-called "fall lottery"). Furthermore, these elements may be set as termination conditions individually, or in combination.

These termination conditions may be set to the same for all specific game states that can be set after a jackpot game, or may be set for some of the specific game states that can be set. Furthermore, the termination conditions may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the contents of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. 15(B), the game may be controlled in a high probability high base game state after the end of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol D. Here, the high probability high base game state may be allowed to continue until the jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Furthermore, the game may be controlled in a low probability high base game state after the end of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E. Here, an end condition may be set for this low probability high base game state, and the end condition may be set to 100 times of variable display of special symbols. Note that the relationship between the jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the contents of the end condition is one example, and is not limited to this.

Also, focusing on the gaming profit of a jackpot, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the jackpot play is also called a "high probability jackpot." Furthermore, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and time-saving state after the jackpot play is also called a "variable jackpot." In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and time-saving state after the jackpot play is also called a "time-saving jackpot."

Next, the main effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to Figures 16 to 32. Note that, for the purposes of presentation, the pachinko gaming machine PY is associated with a baseball story as a theme featuring a main character and an enemy character.

4-1. Presentation mode First, the presentation mode will be described. The presentation mode is a category of presentation (or a higher conceptual attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set the following presentation modes: a customer waiting presentation mode, a normal presentation mode, a probability variation presentation mode, a time-saving presentation mode, and a big win presentation mode.

The customer waiting performance mode can be set when the special chart variable display is not performed in the "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state", and is a performance mode that indicates a standby state in which the special chart variable display is not performed. When the customer waiting performance mode is set, the customer waiting performance is performed. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), a customer waiting demo video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition, when the first performance button 41k is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, a setting screen G101 for setting the performance of the pachinko game machine PY is displayed as shown in FIG. 16 (B). The settings related to the performance include the volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 52, the brightness setting of the display unit 50a, and the frequency setting of the performance to be executed. The items of the settings related to the performance can be set appropriately. Additionally, the setting screen G101 can be prevented from being displayed by the player during the customer waiting demo video G100.

The normal presentation mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state" and is a presentation mode that indicates a normal game state. Furthermore, multiple lower-level presentation modes that belong to the normal presentation mode can be provided. For example, a first normal presentation mode, a second normal presentation mode, and a third normal presentation mode can be provided as lower-level presentation modes that belong to the normal presentation mode.

In the following, a lower-level presentation mode belonging to a presentation mode is also referred to as a "presentation stage". Accordingly, the first normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "first normal presentation stage", the second normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "second normal presentation stage", and the third normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "third normal presentation stage". In addition, unless there are special circumstances, the presentation mode that is set when the special chart variation display is first started after the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on is basically the first normal presentation stage (first normal presentation mode). However, the type of presentation mode that is set initially is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When multiple presentation stages belonging to the normal presentation mode are provided in this way, the presentation stages can be switched in sequence repeatedly when a specific switching condition is met. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set to a specific number of special chart variable presentations being performed without winning a jackpot. Furthermore, the switching condition can also be set to a specific presentation being executed, such as a special chart variable presentation based on a SP reach miss fluctuation.

As will be described later, a reach may occur during the special chart change performance, but the special chart change performance can be divided into the entire section of the special chart change performance when a reach does not occur, the early part before the reach is established when a reach occurs, and the late part after the reach is established when a reach occurs. The early part is composed of the "normal change" mentioned above.

In the first part of the first normal performance stage, the display unit 50a displays a background image (FIG. 17(A): first normal background image G111) that mainly shows the scenery of a city. In the first part of the second normal performance stage, the display unit 50a displays a background image (FIG. 17(B): second normal background image G112) that mainly shows the grounds of a baseball field. In the first part of the third normal performance stage, the display unit 50a displays a background image (FIG. 17(C): third normal background image G113) that mainly shows the inside of a restaurant. On the other hand, in the latter parts of the first to third normal performance stages, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and a dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal performance mode is displayed.

The dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the normal presentation mode may be a background image common to the normal presentation mode regardless of the type of presentation stage, or may be a different background image for each presentation stage.

Also, the normal presentation mode may be set in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal presentation mode may be a presentation mode that indicates a non-time-saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined presentation mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal presentation mode may be provided. Furthermore, a predetermined presentation mode different from the normal presentation mode may be set in a low probability low base game state that occurs under certain conditions, and in a high probability low base game state.

The high probability high base game mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state" and is a game mode that indicates that the game is in a high probability high base game state. In the first part of the high probability game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a background image representing space (high probability game background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and high probability game background music is output from the speaker 52. In addition, in the second part of the high probability game mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the high probability game mode is displayed.

The time-saving presentation mode can be set in the "low probability high base game state" or the "high probability high base game state", and is a presentation mode that indicates that the game is in either the low probability high base game state or the high probability high base game state, and is at least in the time-saving state. In the first part of the time-saving presentation mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(E), a background image showing the sky (time-saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and time-saving background music is output from the speaker 52. In addition, in the second part of the time-saving presentation mode, a dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the time-saving presentation mode is displayed.

The time-saving presentation mode can be set only in a low-probability, high-base game state, and can also be set as a presentation mode that indicates that the game is in a low-probability, high-base game state.

Furthermore, for either or both of the probability variation presentation mode and the time-saving presentation mode, multiple presentation stages for that presentation mode may be provided, similar to the normal presentation mode, and the presentation stage may be switched when a predetermined switching condition is met.

The jackpot presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a presentation mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot presentation mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(A), a jackpot opening presentation is performed in which an opening image G1 suggesting the start of a jackpot game and a right-hit image G2 encouraging a "right hit" are displayed on the display unit 50a. In addition, during the opening, a background image (opening background image G200) according to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a in the background of the opening image G1 and right-hit image G2 as a jackpot opening presentation.

In the jackpot presentation mode, during a round of play in a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(B), the display unit 50a displays the right-hit image G2 continuously from the opening, and displays a round image G3 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of prize balls paid out, in a round presentation. In addition, during a round of play, a background image (round background image G201) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a in the background of the right-hit image G2, round image G3, and prize ball number image G4, and background music corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, during the ending of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), a jackpot ending presentation is performed on the display unit 50a, in which an ending image G5 suggesting the presentation mode that will be set after the jackpot game and a total number of winning balls image G6 suggesting the total number of winning balls paid out are displayed. In addition, during the ending, a background image (ending background image G202) according to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as the background of the ending image G5 and the total number of winning balls image G6 as a jackpot ending presentation.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, round effect, and jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as the "jackpot game effect" as the effects executed in the jackpot game. In other words, the jackpot game effect is performed in the jackpot effect mode.

4-2. Special chart change performance Next, the special chart change performance will be described. When the variable display of the special chart is started, the pachinko game machine PY executes the special chart change performance based on the special chart change pattern related to the variable display of the special chart and the special chart lottery result (the big win determination result, the big win pattern type determination result, the reach determination result, and the special chart change pattern determination result).

In the special chart change performance, the display unit 50a displays the change in the performance pattern superimposed on a specified background image. In the change display of the performance pattern, the performance pattern changes and then stops. In other words, after the special chart change time and the change display of the performance pattern are performed, the change stops and the performance pattern is displayed as stopped. And basically, the result of the special chart lottery is announced by the stopped display of the performance pattern.

In addition, in the special chart change performance performed on the display unit 50a, it is possible to use images other than the change display of the performance pattern. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, it is possible to perform the special chart change performance using various performance devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board moving device 55, a first performance button device 41, and a second performance button device 42.

Next, we will explain the performance patterns displayed on the display unit 50a in the special chart variable performance executed in response to the special chart variable display. The performance patterns are also identification information for indicating the special chart lottery result, and multiple types of performance patterns are provided. In detail, one of the components of the performance pattern constitutes the identification information for indicating the special chart lottery result, and multiple types of performance patterns are provided depending on the difference in that identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), nine performance patterns can be provided, each consisting of the numbers 1 to 9. The performance pattern including the number "1" is designated as performance pattern G10a. Similarly, the performance patterns including the numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance patterns G10b to G10e. For convenience, when the individual performance patterns are treated interchangeably, they are collectively referred to as "performance pattern G10".

In addition, the number parts of the performance patterns G10c and G10g relating to "3" and "7" are red, and the number parts of the performance patterns G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i relating to "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and "9" are blue. In other words, color is included as a component of the performance pattern G10. Note that the configuration of the performance pattern G10 and what is set as the identification information may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the performance pattern G10.

Next, the performance pattern display area for displaying the performance pattern G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the display unit 50a can be divided horizontally into three approximately equal parts, with the left, center, and right parts being the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3. The performance pattern G10 is displayed in each of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3.

And, mainly in the first part of the special chart change performance, the performance pattern G10 displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1", the performance pattern G10 displayed in the middle performance pattern area 50b2 is collectively referred to as "middle performance pattern EZ2", and the performance pattern G10 displayed in the right performance pattern area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "right performance pattern EZ3". That is, the performance pattern G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3 in common, but when distinguishing the performance pattern G10 by the relative display position, it is written as left performance pattern EZ1, middle performance pattern EZ2, and right performance pattern EZ3.

As described later, in the special chart variation performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, but ultimately, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a manner that indicates the special chart lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot pattern type, reach determination result). When a jackpot is announced as the special chart lottery result, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a stopped state so that three performance symbols G10 of the same number are lined up horizontally (so-called "double numbers"). Therefore, in the following, the performance symbols G10 consisting of the same numbers that constitute the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are displayed in a stopped state when announcing a jackpot are referred to as "jackpot performance symbols". For example, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a stopped state as "7-7-7", the jackpot performance symbol is "performance symbol G10g", and when they are displayed in a stopped state as "9-9-9", the jackpot performance symbol is "performance symbol G10i". Furthermore, the jackpot performance symbols may be abbreviated by the numbers included in the performance symbols. For example, if the jackpot performance symbol is "performance symbol G10g", the jackpot performance symbol will be "7", and if the jackpot performance symbol is "performance symbol G10i", the jackpot performance symbol will be "9". As described later, in the special chart variation performance, the special chart lottery result is completely shown when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special chart variation performance, before the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are provisionally stopped and displayed (provisionally stopped and displayed). This is because the contents of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that were once provisionally stopped and displayed may change. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are provisionally stopped and displayed in a certain (relatively disadvantageous to the player) jackpot indicating mode, they may be changed to another (relatively advantageous to the player) jackpot indicating mode. Therefore, when the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in this manner for the first time to indicate a jackpot (before they are changed), the effect pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers that make up the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is also referred to as the "jackpot effect pattern."

In addition, in the special chart change performance, the change display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the change display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, a reach may be performed in which the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped) at the performance symbol G10 of the same number. As described later, a reach is a performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game state, and the reaching increases the chance of a jackpot. Therefore, the performance symbol G10 consisting of the same number that constitutes the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 related to the reach is called a "reach performance symbol." For example, when the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped at the performance symbol G10a of "1", the reach performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", and when they are temporarily stopped at the performance symbol G10a of "3", the reach performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c". Furthermore, the reach performance pattern may be abbreviated by the number included in the performance pattern. For example, if the reach performance pattern is "performance pattern G10a", the reach performance pattern is abbreviated to "1", and if the reach performance pattern is "performance pattern G10c", the reach performance pattern is abbreviated to "3".

As shown in FIG. 19(B), a small pattern area 50c for variably displaying small patterns can be provided in a section at the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display unit 50a. In the small pattern area 50c, the small patterns can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special pattern. The design of the small patterns can be set as appropriate, and for example, the number portion of the performance pattern G10 can be directly reduced to form the small pattern.

In FIG. 19(B), the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, the right performance pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed lines, but this is written to indicate the range of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, the right performance pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c, and is not actually displayed.

As mentioned above, the effects that make up the presentation flow of the special chart change presentation include normal changes, N reaches, L reaches, SP reaches, and battle presentations. Some of these will be explained here.

4-2-1. Normal change In the special pattern change performance, the pachinko game machine PY can first perform normal change. Normal change functions as a performance that suggests that the variable display of the special pattern has started. Next, normal change will be explained in detail. In addition, as small patterns, the left small pattern KZ1, the middle small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern KZ3 corresponding to the left performance pattern EZ1, the middle performance pattern EZ2, and the right performance pattern EZ3 are variably displayed in the small pattern area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), on the display unit 50a, the left performance pattern EZ1, the middle performance pattern EZ2, and the right performance pattern EZ3 are displayed frozen, while the left small pattern KZ1, the medium and small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern KZ3 are displayed frozen. The special pattern is not being displayed in a variable manner, and when the variable display of the special pattern is started from a state in which the variable display of the special pattern is waiting, the special pattern variable display starts with the start, as shown in FIG. 20(B). Specifically, the variable display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the variable display of the left small pattern KZ1, the medium and small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern KZ3 starts.

The display mode of the change display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the change display of the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 can be made different. For example, the change display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 can be made by scrolling each of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display unit 50a, and the change display of the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 can be made by switching each of the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 one after another in a fixed position. Note that the display mode of the change display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the change display of the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 can be made the same.

In addition, the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 change at high speed immediately after the change display begins. While the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 are being displayed changing at high speed, the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 are basically displayed with a transparency that allows the images in the background, such as background images G111 to G114, to be easily seen.

If the special chart change pattern of the special chart variable display is a special chart change pattern of a no-reach miss (for example, a normal miss change), a reach does not occur, and as the special chart variable display ends (special chart stop display), the stop display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with a miss number (so-called "barake number") that is specific to a no-reach miss.

For example, as the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 stop, first, as shown in Figure 20(C), the left effect pattern EZ1 temporarily stops (provisionally stops) in approximately the center position in the vertical direction, then, as shown in Figure 20(D), the right effect pattern EZ3 temporarily stops (provisionally stops) in approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in Figure 20(E), the middle effect pattern EZ2 temporarily stops (provisionally stops) in approximately the center position in the vertical direction.

And finally, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped) in a horizontal line approximately in the center vertically, all stop completely in the same position as shown in Figure 20 (F), and their stopping is confirmed (the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed as stopped). When the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which were temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped), come to a complete stop with a sparse pattern, that is, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed as definitely stopped, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 stop all at once with the same sparse pattern as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also displayed as stopped.

Note that when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped, it means that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move significantly like a scrolling display, but rather sway slightly or move back and forth slightly in place. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped is different from the state in which the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped, but these temporary and definitive stopped displays are sometimes broadly referred to as "stopped displays." Also, in the example of Figure 20, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped, the performance symbols stop in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3 → center performance symbol EZ2, but the stopping order (method) is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, the establishment of a reach will be explained. Even if the special chart variable display pattern of the special chart is a reach-miss special chart variable pattern (for example, N miss variation), basically, in the same way as the above-mentioned case of no reach, in the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 21 (A), the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely displayed as stopped, and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed as stopped, and the variable display of the special chart starts, and as shown in FIG. 21 (B), the variable display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the variable display of the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

After that, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 21(C), the left performance pattern EZ1 for the number "5" stops provisionally (temporarily stopped) in approximately the vertical center position, and then, as shown in FIG. 21(D), the right performance pattern EZ3 for the same number "5" stops provisionally (temporarily stopped) in a horizontal line in approximately the vertical center position, and a reach is established. When a reach is established, an image (reach establishment suggestion image) G11 is displayed indicating that a reach has been established. Note that even if a reach is established with the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3, the variable display of the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 continues.

In addition, in the example of Figure 21, when a reach is achieved, the performance symbols temporarily stop (provisionally stop) in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3, but the order (method) of the temporary stops is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate. In addition, the number of the performance symbols that make up the reach is not limited to "5". In addition, the position where they temporarily stop (provisionally stop) is not limited to approximately the center position in the vertical direction. In addition, the direction in which the performance symbols that make up the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be other directions such as diagonal.

In this way, the entire period of the special chart change performance in the case of a miss without a reach, and the section from the start of the special chart change performance to the time the reach is established in the case of a reach, can be considered as normal change. However, the time until the reach is established can be set appropriately based on the special chart change pattern, etc. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various preview performances such as so-called "pseudo consecutive wins," cut-in previews, and dialogue previews before the reach is established. Alternatively, it is also possible to enter a so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. N Reach When a reach is established after a normal variation, the pachinko game machine PY can perform an N reach. The N reach is a performance that suggests that the result of the special drawing may be a "jackpot," and functions as a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot. Next, the N reach will be specifically described.

When a reach is achieved, an N reach is performed from that point, as shown in FIG. 21(D), for example. In an N reach, the state when the reach is achieved is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), as shown in FIG. 22(A). When an N reach begins, the medium performance pattern EZ2, which is changing (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually slows down, as shown in FIG. 22(B).

When the special pattern change pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a special pattern change pattern with a reach and a miss (for example, an N miss change), the center performance pattern EZ2 is temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction from the state where the reach is established, and a stop display of the performance pattern indicating a miss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, the center performance pattern EZ2 consisting of a number different from the numbers that constitute the reach ("4" in FIG. 22 (C-1)) is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 22 (C-1). Then, with the end of the variable display of the special pattern (stop display of the special pattern), the provisional stop state becomes a completely stopped state as shown in FIG. 22 (D-1), and the left performance pattern EZ1, center performance pattern EZ2, and right performance pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed with a miss number specific to the reach and miss.

In addition, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been temporarily stopped (provisionally stopped), come to a complete stop with a miss that is specific to a reach-with-miss, in other words, when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed as stopped, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 all stop with the same miss that is specific to a reach-with-miss as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also displayed as stopped. Note that the content of the N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special chart change performance does not end with the N reach, as shown in Figure 22 (C-2), when the remaining middle performance pattern EZ2 that has not stopped changes again at high speed, the entire display section 50a will gradually turn white, and after whitening out, it may develop (switch) to an L reach or SP reach, as shown in Figure 22 (D-2).

4-2-4. L Reach The pachinko game machine PY can perform an L reach after an N reach. The L reach is a performance that suggests that the result of the special drawing is more likely to be a "jackpot" than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. The established reach is maintained even in the L reach, but for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), at the start of the L reach, the performance patterns EZ1 and EZ3 that constitute the reach are reduced and moved to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small pattern area 50c in the display unit 50a (for example, the left performance pattern EZ1 is at the top left of the display unit 50a, and the right performance pattern EZ3 is at the top right of the display unit 50a).

At the start of an L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), a background image dedicated to L reach (background image for L reach G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The background image for L reach G114 is composed of a video in which a specific story unfolds. The content of the story of the video related to the background image for L reach G114 can be set appropriately, but in a basic embodiment, it is composed of the main character confessing his love to a girl.

When the L reach background image G114 is displayed, it first starts with a scene in which the main character is waiting for a girl at a certain meeting place, as shown in Figure 23 (A). Then, as shown in Figure 23 (B), the girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, the middle performance pattern EZ2 appears in approximately the center of the display unit 50a, with the performance pattern of the number "5" that is part of the reach and the performance pattern of the number "4" that is not part of the reach, and slowly rotates from the back to the front and then back to the back.

While the number "4" and number "5" performance symbols continue to rotate, the Suri related to the L reach background image G114 progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), the scene where the main character confesses his love to the girl is reached. At this time, in the approximate center of the display unit 50a, the number "5" performance symbol constituting the reach and the number "4" performance symbol not constituting the reach collide with each other to knock the other away. Since the number "5" performance symbol constitutes the reach and the number "4" performance symbol does not constitute the reach, when the number "4" performance symbol is knocked away and the number "5" performance symbol remains, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a mode indicating a big win is established, whereas when the number "5" performance symbol is knocked away and the number "4" performance symbol remains, the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a mode indicating a reach miss is established. Therefore, the scene in FIG. 23(C) is the final stage of the L reach, and constitutes a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point") where either a performance suggesting a jackpot (a jackpot suggestion performance) will be executed, or a performance suggesting a miss (a miss suggestion performance) will be executed.

When the special chart change pattern of the variable display of the special chart is a jackpot change (L jackpot change) at the winning/losing branching point, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1), a close-up of a smiling girl is displayed on the display unit 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), the main character is displayed looking happy about his successful confession, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, the left performance pattern EZ1 and right performance pattern EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach are displayed in a provisionally stopped state in the center of the display unit 50a, along with the number "5" center performance pattern EZ2 that constitutes the reach. In other words, the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed provisionally stopped in a state indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character who is happy about his successful confession and the output of a specified sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion performance. After the jackpot suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a stopped state in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special chart change pattern of the variable display of the special chart is a reach miss change (L miss change) after the winning/losing branch point, no big win suggestion effect is performed, and instead, in the L reach background image G114, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), a close-up of a girl with a sad expression is displayed on the display unit 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), the main character is displayed looking disappointed after failing to confess his feelings. At this time, the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 of the number "5" that constitutes the reach are displayed in a provisionally stopped state in the center of the display unit 50a, along with the number "5" that does not constitute the reach. In other words, the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a provisionally stopped state indicating a reach miss.

The display of the main character, who is disappointed after failing to confess, constitutes a failure indication effect. After the failure indication effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with a failure number for the reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach In addition, the pachinko game machine PY can perform an SP Reach after an N Reach. The SP Reach is a performance that suggests that the result of the special drawing is more likely to be a "jackpot" than the L Reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. In addition, the established Reach is maintained even in the SP Reach, but for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), at the start of the SP Reach, the performance patterns EZ1 and EZ3 that constitute the Reach are reduced and moved to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small pattern area 50c in the display unit 50a (for example, the left performance pattern EZ1 is at the top left of the display unit 50a, and the right performance pattern EZ3 is at the top right of the display unit 50a).

At the start of an SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a background image dedicated to the SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a video in which a specific story unfolds. The content of the story of the video related to the SP reach background image G115 can be set as appropriate, but in a basic embodiment, it is composed of a showdown between a main character and an enemy character who is the rival of the main character. The main character is a baseball pitcher, the enemy character is a baseball batter, and the two characters face off in the roles of pitcher and batter in a baseball game.

When the SP reach background image G115 is displayed, first, as shown in FIG. 25(A), an enemy character appears, and then, as shown in FIG. 25(B), an image indicating that the SP reach has started (SP reach start title image) G11 is displayed in the center of the display unit 50a. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a indicating the title of the SP reach "In FIG. 25(B), 'Strike out the enemy batter XX!!'" and an effect image G11b that enhances the title image G11a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(C), a scene is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character face off against each other. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws the ball, as shown in FIG. 26(B), the ball moves toward the enemy character, as shown in FIG. 26(C), and the enemy character begins to swing the bat, as shown in FIG. 26(C). Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and a scene is reached in which the showdown between the main character and the enemy character is about to be concluded. This scene constitutes a branching point (win/lose branching point) where the main character wins the showdown between pitcher and batter, suggesting a big win, or loses, suggesting a miss.

After this winning/losing turning point, if the special chart change pattern of the variable display of the special chart is a jackpot change (SP jackpot change), as shown in FIG. 27 (A-1), the display unit 50a will display the main character striking out the enemy character and letting out a roar on the mound as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), after which the main character will be shown on the display unit 50a, striking out the enemy character and letting out a roar as the main character stands on the mound, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), and a predetermined sound effect will be output from the speaker 52. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily displayed in a manner that indicates a jackpot.

The display of the main character roaring in victory and the output of a specified sound effect constitute the big win indication effect. After the big win indication effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in a manner indicating a big win.

On the other hand, if the special chart change pattern of the variable display of the special chart is a reach miss change (SP miss change) after the winning/losing turning point, no big win suggestion effect is performed, and in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 27 (A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the showdown, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character appears dejected on the mound. At this time, the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach miss.

The display of the main character looking dejected after losing the match constitutes the miss indication effect. After the miss indication effect, as shown in Figure 27 (C-2), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with a miss for the reach.

Next, we will explain the movable body effects and operation effects that are performed in the special chart change effects. The movable body effects and operation effects may be performed as part of the aforementioned SP reach, L reach, and N reach, as well as jackpot game effects, by being incorporated into these effects, or they may be performed independently of these effects. First, we will explain the movable body effects.

The pachinko game machine PY can perform a moving body performance involving the movement of a moving body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special chart change performance or a big win game performance. The moving body performance is a performance using a moving device such as the board moving device 55, and functions as a performance that suggests the expectation of a big win or the development to a SP reach.

For example, when the movable body performance functions as a performance suggesting the development to SP Reach, as shown in FIG. 28(A), when the special chart change performance develops from N Reach to SP Reach, first, as shown in FIG. 28(B), the board movable device 55 is activated, and the board movable body 55k descends to the operating position when viewed from the front, and is held in that position for a predetermined time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to its normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to its normal standby state, the performance develops to SP Reach. Note that the operation of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Presentation Next, the operation presentation will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can perform operation presentations including operation promotion presentations and operation result presentations corresponding to the operation of the first presentation button 41k, the second presentation button 42k, etc., at a predetermined timing in a predetermined presentation such as a special chart change presentation or a big win game presentation. The operation promotion presentation is a presentation that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result presentation is a presentation that is performed according to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion presentation, and each of them functions as a presentation that makes the player expect a big win.

For example, as described above, when a win/lose branch point is reached in an L reach or SP reach, a period during which pressing the first effect button 41k is valid (valid operation period) occurs, and with the occurrence of this valid operation period, an effect is performed that encourages the operation of the first effect button 41k (operation promotion effect), as shown in FIG. 29 (A).

In the operation promotion performance, a first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first performance button 41k that is the operation target, an image (press operation image) G12b representing the operation mode (i.e., press operation) of the first performance button 41k, and an image (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first performance button 41k.

The remaining valid operation period image G12c is made up of a roughly curved progress bar, and changes over time so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the valid operation period. Figure 29(B) shows the state when the valid operation period has occurred and 1/3 of the valid operation period has passed.

When the special chart change pattern of the variable display of the special chart is a jackpot change (SP jackpot change), the operation result display is performed after the first performance button 41k is pressed during the effective operation period, or after the remaining time of the effective operation period runs out without the first performance button 41k being operated during the effective operation period.

As an operation result presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the board moving device 55 is activated, the board moving body 55k descends to the operating position and is held in that position for a predetermined time, while the rotating member 55k1 rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes a moving body presentation. Furthermore, at this time, as an operation result presentation, an effect image G13 accompanying the movement of the board moving body 55k is displayed across the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 stops, and the board moving body 55k rises, ending the operation result presentation. When the operation result presentation ends, a jackpot suggestion presentation is performed.

On the other hand, if the special chart change pattern of the variable display of the special chart is a reach miss change (SP miss change), even if the first performance button 41k is pressed during the operation valid period, or even if the remaining time of the performance button operation valid period runs out without the first performance button 41k being pressed, the operation result performance is not performed, and a miss indication performance is performed.

The operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board moving device 55 or the display of the effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Also, the operation presentation is not limited to the special chart change presentation, but can also be performed in the jackpot presentation.

4-5. Pre-reading performance Next, a pre-reading performance that can be executed before the special chart variable display that is the target of the special chart reservation is executed will be described. The pachinko game machine PY can perform a pre-reading performance for the special chart 1 reservation or the special chart 2 reservation for which a jackpot judgment has not been performed, based on the result of the pre-reading judgment, at any timing of the special chart variable performance. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests the jackpot expectation for the special chart 1 reservation or the special chart 2 reservation, and functions as a performance that makes players expect a jackpot before the variable display of the special chart corresponding to that reservation. As an example of a pre-reading performance, there is a reservation change notice using a reservation performance that represents a special chart reservation. Here, a reservation performance and a reservation change notice performed in the normal performance mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30(A), the hold display is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a section approximately in the center of the bottom end of the display unit 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which divide the hold display area 50d into four approximately equal areas in the left-right direction. In other words, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end in the hold display area 50d.

The first area 50d1 displays a reserved icon representing the special chart 1 reservation that occurred first among the reserved special chart 1 reservations and that will be first to have the special chart 1 variable display performed based on the special chart 1 related random number corresponding to that special chart 1 reservation. Similarly, the second area 50d2 to the fourth area 50d4 display reserved icons representing the special chart 1 reservation that occurred second to fourth among the reserved special chart 1 reservations and that will be second to fourth to have the special chart 1 variable display performed based on the special chart 1 related random number corresponding to that special chart 1 reservation.

Note that, below, the special drawing 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special drawing 1 reservation in reservation order 1." Similarly, the special drawing 1 reservations corresponding to the reservation icons displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 are referred to as "special drawing 1 reservation in reservation order 2," "special drawing 1 reservation in reservation order 3," and "special drawing 1 reservation in reservation order 4." In other words, the existing special drawing 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order in which they occurred.

In addition, the display area 50e is formed to the left of the reserved display area 50d. The icon representing the currently active special chart 1 change display is displayed in the display area 50e. Therefore, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the reserved icon displayed in the reserved display area 50d, and strictly speaking is not included in the "reserved performance" corresponding to the reserved special chart 1. However, since there is a relationship between the display of the reserved icon and the display of the icon, hereinafter, the display of the reserved icon and the display of the icon are collectively referred to as the "reserved performance". Furthermore, the reserved icon and the icon are collectively referred to as the "icon". Furthermore, the currently active special chart 1 change display indicated by the icon is also referred to as the "change".

In FIG. 30(A), the pending display area 50d and the display area 50e are indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are indicated by dashed lines, but this is written to indicate the range of the pending display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4, and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the reserved performance will be described. In the following description, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special chart 1 variable display is in progress (special chart variable display is in progress) and the number of reserved special charts 1 (U1) is "2". Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), a reserved icon HA2 representing the special chart 1 reserved that occurred first among the currently reserved special charts 1 (special chart 1 reserved in reserved order 1) is displayed in the first area 50d1 not shown in the above, and a reserved icon HA3 representing the special chart 1 reserved that occurred next to the special chart 1 reserved represented by the reserved icon HA2 (special chart 1 reserved in reserved order 2) is displayed in the second area 50d2 not shown in the above. In addition, the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special chart 1 variable display is displayed in the display area 50e not shown in the above. Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30 (B) is the normal mode.

In this way, in the reserved performance, the reserved special symbols are displayed in the order in which they were reserved, from the left end to the right end of the reserved display area 50d. In other words, the variable display of the reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol-related judgment information stored in the special symbol reserved memory unit 105, is displayed individually as a reserved icon.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1, which represented the special pattern variable display that was being performed immediately before that, is erased. Next, when the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variable effect) is started based on the special pattern 1 reservation that represents the reservation icon HA2, the reservation icon HA2 and the reservation icon HA3 shift. Specifically, the reservation icon HA2 that was displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown), and the reservation icon HA3 that was displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). In other words, the reservation icon HA2 and the reservation icon HA3 that were displayed shift one to the left each. This is because the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved icon HA2 has begun, and the special pattern 1 reserved represented by the reserved icon HA3 has become the special pattern 1 reserved that occurred earliest among the currently reserved special pattern 1 reserves, and has become the next special pattern variable display to be started, so that the reserved icon HA2 and the reserved icon HA3 can be adapted to the situation.

The reserved icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special pattern 1 variable display that is currently being executed, and therefore becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. In other words, the word that precedes "icon" is "reserved" for the icon displayed in the reserved display area 50d, and "relevant" for the icon displayed in the display area 50e. In other words, when a reserved icon is displayed and the start condition for the variable display of the special pattern for the reserved special pattern indicated by the reserved icon is met, the reserved icon corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern related to the satisfaction of the start condition is displayed as the icon.

When the icon changes from a hold icon to the relevant icon, in other words, when the icon moves from hold display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged to approximately twice its size when it moves from hold display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e.

If, from this situation, a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 and a special chart 1 reservation occurs, as shown in FIG. 30(E), a new reservation icon HA4 is displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) described above in response to the occurrence of the special chart 1 reservation.

In this way, when the first starting hole 11 is won and a special chart 1 related random number is obtained, one common icon is displayed. This icon is erased when the special chart 1 variable display based on the winning ends, but while it is displayed, it exists with different names (the reserved icon and the icon in question) depending on the state of the special chart 1 variable display (the reserved state and the running state).

As mentioned above, the start winning command contains win/lose information and special chart change pattern information. Based on this win/lose information and special chart change pattern information, the pachinko gaming machine PY can display the reserved icon in a normal mode or a special mode. Displaying this reserved icon in a special mode is called a "reserved change notice."

When the display mode of the reserved icon is in a special mode, i.e., when a reserved change notice is made, the player can have hope that he or she may win the jackpot with the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved icon. Next, a specific example of a reserved change notice will be explained. As a specific example of a reserved change notice, let us assume that the display mode of the reserved icon HA4 shown in Figure 30 (E) becomes a special mode.

One type of hold change notice is a hold notice type that becomes a special mode immediately after the hold icon is displayed, in other words, a hold change notice is made when a special chart 1 hold occurs (when the ball enters the first starting hole 11). For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 and a special chart 1 hold occurs, as in the case of FIG. 30(E), the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) in response to the occurrence of the special chart 1 hold. In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely still, but in reality, it may be configured to be completely still, or the display position may not move but may be configured to lightly shake in place.

Then, immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to a special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (a hold change notice is given). Note that in the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after it is displayed, but it is also possible to display it in the special mode and eliminate the period during which it is displayed in the normal mode.

Another type of hold change notice is one in which a special mode is displayed when the hold icon moves; in other words, a hold change notice is displayed when the special chart 1 hold is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 and a special chart 1 hold occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special chart 1 hold, the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) is displayed in the second area 50d2 not shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 32(C), when the stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2 that represented the special pattern variable display that was being performed immediately before is erased. Next, when the variable display of the special pattern (special pattern variable effect) is started based on the special pattern 1 reservation represented by the reservation icon HA3, the reservation icon HA3 displayed in the first area 50d1 moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the reservation icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown), as shown in FIG. 32(D). Here, when the reservation icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, its display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (reservation notice is performed).

In addition, multiple types of special modes related to the hold change notice can be provided, so that the probability of winning a jackpot varies depending on the type of special mode. For example, the display mode of the hold icon can be associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display modes of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. The probability of winning a jackpot indicated by the display mode of the hold icon can be set in the following order: white < green < red < gold.

The look-ahead performance can be performed for both or either of the special chart 1 reserve and the special chart 2 reserve. The look-ahead performance is not limited to the display mode of the reserve icon HA, and can be performed using a performance device other than the image display device 50, such as an image other than the reserve icon HA on the display unit 50a, such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emitted by the frame lamp 53, and operation by the board moving device 55. Furthermore, the performance mode of the look-ahead performance may be a performance mode that continues without interruption from the time it is executed, such as a reserve change notice by the reserve icon HA, until the special chart change display begins, or a performance mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as each time the stop display of the performance pattern is performed or each time the change display of the performance pattern begins.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, the control of the game by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to Figures 33 to 42. The flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. The order of execution of multiple processes in the flowchart can be changed as appropriate or executed in parallel as long as no contradiction occurs in the process contents.

The counters, timers, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104. The initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0" (i.e. "OFF"), and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko gaming machine PY is powered on, the gaming control microcomputer 101 provided on the gaming control board 100 reads out the gaming control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the gaming ROM 103 and executes it. As shown in the figure, the gaming control main processing first performs power-on processing (S001).

During the power-on process, the game control microcomputer 101 first sets permission for access to the game RAM 104. This makes it possible to write and read information to the game RAM 104. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a specific operation has been performed on the RAM clear switch 192 mounted on the game control board 100 (whether or not it is ON).

If the RAM clear switch 192 has not been specifically operated, the game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether the power failure flag is ON. The power failure flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of a power failure, and is turned ON by the power failure monitoring process described below.

If the power failure flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates a checksum and compares it with the checksum calculated at the time of the power failure. The checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the game RAM 104 as a numerical value.

If the checksum values match, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the memory contents of the game RAM 104 are normal, and performs setting management of the work area of the game RAM 104 when power is restored. In this setting process, the power restoration information is read from the game ROM 103, and this power restoration information is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power-off flag and performs the power-on command setting process.

In the power-on command setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a setting process for outputting a power-on command to the presentation control board 120 after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, the predetermined time until the power-on command is output is set in a timer, and the timer starts subtracting the time set in the timer. When the subtracted timer value becomes "0", the predetermined time has elapsed, and the power-on command is set in a predetermined output buffer of the game RAM 104. As a result, the set power-on command is output to the presentation control board 120 in the output process (S101) described later. Furthermore, the power recovery information includes information indicating the game state at the time of the power failure. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets, together with the power-on command, a command (game state designation command) indicating the game state at the time of the power failure, which is included in the power recovery information, in a predetermined output buffer. As a result, the set game state designation command is output to the presentation control board 120 together with the power-on command in the output process (S101) described later.

Furthermore, if the power-off flag is not ON, the game control microcomputer 101 clears all game information stored in the game RAM 104, since there is a possibility that the power has not been shut off properly, or if the RAM clear switch 192 has been specifically operated. After that, the game control microcomputer 101 performs initial settings for the working area of the game RAM 104. In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the working area of the game RAM 104. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command to the performance control board 120 to notify that the RAM has been cleared, and performs power-on command setting processing.

After the power-on process, the gaming control microcomputer 101 prohibits interrupts (S002) and executes the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal symbol related judgment information and the special symbol related judgment information are updated by incrementing them by 1. The counters related to various random numbers (random number counters) are means for generating random numbers in a software manner. When the counter value (random number counter value) of each random number counter reaches its upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. In addition, at least a portion of each random number may be so-called hardware random numbers generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

When the normal and special symbols main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). During the interrupt permission, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the game CPU 102, for example, at a 4 msec cycle. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a 4 msec cycle. Then, from the end of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started, the update process of the counter values of various random numbers by the normal and special symbols main random number update process (S003) is repeatedly executed. Note that, if an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 when the interrupt is prohibited, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt permission (S004) is issued.

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control timer interrupt process (S005) will be described. As shown in Fig. 34, in the game control timer interrupt process (S005), first, the output process (S101) is executed. In the output process (S101), commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the performance control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) that follows the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in a detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects whether the surplus ball storage hole 35A is full, and stores this in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 as lower tray full data.

The normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) that is performed next is the same as the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003) that is performed in the game control main process in FIG. 33. In other words, the update process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal symbol related judgment information and the special symbol related judgment information is performed both during the execution period of the game control timer interrupt process (S005) and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) to the start of the next game control timer interrupt process (S005)).

Following the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then a normal action process (S105), and then a special action process (S106). The sensor detection process, normal action process, and special action process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes (S107) and ends the game control timer interrupt process (S005). Other processes (S107) include power off monitoring when the power is turned off and updating the timer provided in the game RAM 104. Other processes (S107) include a payout control process to pay out prize balls to the player. In the payout control process, a check is made to see whether the prize ball counter for the first start port 11, the prize ball counter for the second start port 12, the prize ball counter for the large prize port 14, and the prize ball counter for the general prize port 10 exceed "0", and if they exceed "0", a prize ball request signal is sent to the payout control board 170. When the prize ball signal is sent, an update process is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter related to that signal.

The gaming control microcomputer 101 then repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the gaming control main process until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later), it again executes the gaming control timer interrupt process (S005). In the output process (S101) of the gaming control timer interrupt process (S005) that has been executed again, the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the commands and the like that were set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous gaming control timer interrupt process (S005).

[Sensor detection process]
Next, the sensor detection process will be described with reference to Figures 35 and 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not entered the general winning opening 10 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if a game ball has entered the general winning opening 10 (YES in S201), a general winning opening prize ball process is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the game ball (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball process, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10 ("3" in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, i.e., whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), it is determined whether the normal operation status is 1, which will be described later, in other words, whether neither the normal pattern variable display nor the auxiliary game is being performed (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S207. If the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the normal pattern random number indicated by the counter value of the normal pattern random number counter (LABEL-TRND-F) is obtained as normal pattern related judgment information (S205), and the obtained normal pattern related judgment information is stored in the normal pattern reservation memory unit 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S207, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 12, i.e., whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 12a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 12 (NO in S207), the process proceeds to step S214. If a game ball has entered the second start hole 12 (YES in S207), second start hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the game ball (S208). In the second start hole prize ball processing, the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the second start hole 12 ("2" in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the second start hole 12.

Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved special figures 2 (specifically, the value of the counter (reserved special figure 2 counter) that counts the number of reserved special figures 2 provided in the gaming RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more (S209). If the reserved special figure 2 number is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the reserved special figure 2 number is not "4" or more (less than "4") (NO in S209), a reserved special figure 2 number addition process is performed (S210). In the reserved special figure 2 number addition process, the reserved special figure 2 number counter is added by "1" and the reserved special figure 2 number indicated by the reserved special figure 2 indicator 83b is increased by "1".

Next, special chart 2 related judgment information consisting of a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP) is obtained and stored in a special symbol related judgment information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second look-ahead judgment process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead judgment process, the second start winning command is identified by comparing the current game state and the special chart 2 related judgment information acquired in step S211 with the second look-ahead judgment table shown in FIG. 14, and the identified second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special chart 2 related judgment information acquired in step S211 in the special chart 2 reservation memory unit 105b (S213).

Next, in step S214, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start hole 11, i.e., whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 11a. If a game ball has not entered the first start hole 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221. If a game ball has entered the first start hole 11 (YES in S214), a first start hole prize ball process is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the game ball (S215). In the first start hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls corresponding to the entry into the first start hole 11 ("4" in the basic embodiment) is added to the prize ball counter for the first start hole 11.

Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved special charts 1 (specifically, the value of the counter (reserved special chart 1 counter) that counts the number of reserved special charts 1 provided in the gaming RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more (S216). If the reserved special chart 1 number is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the reserved special chart 1 number is not "4" or more (is less than "4") (NO in S216), a reserved special chart 1 number addition process is performed (S217). In the reserved special chart 1 number addition process, the reserved special chart 1 number counter is added by "1" and the reserved special chart 1 number indicated by the reserved special chart 1 indicator 83a is increased by "1".

Next, special chart 1 related judgment information consisting of a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special chart change pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP) is obtained and stored in a special chart related judgment information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first look-ahead judgment process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead judgment process, the current game state and the special chart 1 related judgment information acquired in step S218 are compared with the first look-ahead judgment table shown in FIG. 13 to identify the first start winning command, and the identified first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special chart 1 related judgment information acquired in step S218 in a memory area of the special chart 1 reservation memory unit 105a that corresponds to the current number of special charts 1 reserved (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the large prize opening 14, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the large prize opening sensor 14a. If a game ball has not entered the large prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the large prize opening 14 (YES in S221), it is determined whether or not the counter value of the large prize opening entry counter provided in the game RAM 104 is "9" or more (S222). The large prize opening entry counter is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the large prize opening 14 in one round of the jackpot game. The large prize opening entry counter is cleared each time a round of the game ends. In the basic embodiment, the number of balls that can enter the large prize opening 14 in one round of the game (the specified number of balls that can be entered) is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the large prize opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if the counter value of the large prize opening winning counter is not "11" or more, that is, is less than "11" (NO in S222), the counter value of the large prize opening winning counter is incremented by "1" (S223), a large prize opening winning ball process is performed to pay out a predetermined number of winning balls to the player (S224), and the sensor detection process is terminated. In the large prize opening winning ball process, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning of the large prize opening 14 ("9" in the basic embodiment) is incremented to the prize ball counter for the large prize opening 14. In addition, when a game ball wins the large prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the game control microcomputer 101 may transmit a command (large prize opening winning command) specifying that a winning has occurred in the large prize opening 14 to the performance control board 120. In addition, in the special prize opening ball processing (S224), the game control microcomputer 101 may transmit a command (special prize opening ball command) to the performance control board 120 to specify that a prize ball based on a win in the special prize opening 14 has been paid out.

In addition, a sensor other than sensors 10a to 14a may be provided as a sensor capable of detecting a gaming ball, and processing other than that shown in Figures 35 to 36 may be performed based on the detection of a gaming ball by that sensor.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, the normal operation process for controlling the normal display 82 and the electric chute 12D will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the process for the normal display 82 and the electric chute 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). And, "normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). If the "normal operation status" is "1", it performs the normal symbol waiting process (S1102), if the "normal operation status" is "2", it performs the normal symbol change process (S1103), if the "normal operation status" is "3", it performs the normal symbol determination process (S1104), and if the "normal operation status" is "4", it performs the auxiliary game control process (S1105). Note that the "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the normal symbol variable display and auxiliary play are not being performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a win determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 86. Furthermore, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination is performed based on the current game state to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and the normal symbol display 82 starts displaying the normal symbol fluctuation for the normal symbol fluctuation time according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and the normal operation status is changed to "2". Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal symbol fluctuation start command according to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 when the normal symbol fluctuation display starts.

The normal pattern change process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the normal pattern is changing. In the normal pattern change process (S1103), it is determined whether the normal pattern change time has elapsed since the start of the ongoing normal pattern change display (whether to end the normal pattern change display), and if it is determined that the normal pattern change time has elapsed, the normal pattern is stopped based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern change stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 when the normal pattern change display starts.

The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process that is performed when the normal symbol is displayed stationary. In the normal symbol determination process (S1104), it is determined whether a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stationary display of the ongoing normal symbol (whether to end the stationary display of the normal symbol), and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether the stationary display of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stationary display of the normal symbol is a losing symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if a winning symbol is displayed stationary, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 when the auxiliary game starts.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process that is performed when an auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special Action Processing]
Next, the special operation process related to the control of the special chart display 81, the special chart reserve display 83, and the big prize device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the process related to the special chart display 81, the special chart reserve display 83, and the big prize device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). And, "special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

When the "special operation status" is "1", the game control microcomputer 101 performs a special symbol waiting process (S1502); when the "special operation status" is "2", it performs a special symbol variation process (S1503); when the "special operation status" is "3", it performs a special symbol determination process (S1504); when the "special operation status" is "4", it performs a big win game control process (S1505); when the "special operation status" is "5", it performs a game state setting process (S1506). Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol waiting process (S1502) is a process that is performed during waiting when the special symbol is not being displayed or a jackpot is not being played. The special symbol waiting process will be described in detail later.

The special symbol change process (S1503) is a process that is performed when the special symbol is changing. The special symbol change process will be described in detail later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process that is performed when a special symbol is displayed stationary. The special symbol determination process will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed during a jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs the jackpot game control process to play a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table. When the jackpot game ends, the special operation status is changed to "5". When each round of play starts, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. When all rounds of play end and an ending starts, an ending command indicating an ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to that jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. When the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and controls the jackpot game, this state is called a "jackpot game state", and the state in which the special operation status "4" is set is called a "jackpot game state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the game is to be controlled in a high probability state after the jackpot game, the high probability flag is set ON in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, if the duration of the high probability state is to be limited at this time, the duration is also set. For example, if the end condition of the high probability state is the number of times that the special chart variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as the "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104. Furthermore, if the game is to be controlled in a time-saving state after the jackpot game, the time-saving flag is set ON in the time-saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time-saving state. Furthermore, if the duration of the time-saving state is to be limited at this time, the duration is also set. For example, if the condition for ending the time-saving state is the number of times the special chart variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of times for time-saving") is set in a remaining number of times for time-saving counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, in the game status setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game status command indicating the game status after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

[Special symbol standby process]
Next, the special symbol waiting process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special symbol waiting process (S1502), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 reserved number is "0" (S1601). If the special symbol 2 reserved number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no memory of the special symbol 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning the second starting gate 12, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 reserved number is "0" (S1608). Then, if the special symbol 1 reserved number is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no memory of the special symbol 1 related judgment information acquired due to winning the first starting gate 11, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special pattern waiting process is terminated, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), a command (customer waiting command) indicating that the special pattern variable display and the jackpot game state are not in progress are set in the output buffer (S1619), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1620), and the special pattern waiting process is terminated.

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0" but the number of reserved special charts 1 is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, if there is no special chart 2 related judgment information but there is one or more memories of special chart 1 related judgment information obtained due to winning at the first starting port 11, a special chart 1 judgment process (S1609) and a special chart 1 change pattern judgment process (S1610) are performed.

In the special pattern 1 determination process (S1609), the earliest special pattern random number stored in the special pattern 1 reserved memory unit 105a is read out, and a determination is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a miss (jackpot determination) based on the jackpot determination table associated with the game state.

If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined (jackpot symbol type determination) based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table. Then, jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in a special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and a symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in an output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss," the miss pattern data indicating the miss is set in the special pattern buffer, and the pattern designation command indicating the miss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the current state is not time-saving (S1651). If the current state is not time-saving (YES in S1651), a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state is selected (S1652) before proceeding to step S1654, and if the current state is not time-saving (NO in S1651), a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state is selected (S1653) before proceeding to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 judges whether the jackpot judgment result is a "jackpot". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655. If it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), the process selects a special pattern 1 variation table for the jackpot pattern from the special pattern 1 variation pattern judgment tables selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1659), and then proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a reach judgment. In the reach judgment, the reach random number is read and the reach random number is compared with a reach judgment table corresponding to the current game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state) to judge whether or not there is a reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table for reach with miss from the special chart 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658) and then proceed to step S1660. If there is no reach (NO in S1656), check the current number of reserved special charts 1, and select a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach with miss according to the number of reserved special charts 1 from the special chart 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1657) and then proceed to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special symbol variation pattern random number, and compares the special symbol variation pattern random number with the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659 to perform a special symbol 1 variation pattern determination to determine the special symbol 1 variation pattern. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special symbol 1 variation start command indicating the determined special symbol 1 variation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), sets the special symbol variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol 1 variation pattern in the special operation timer (S1662), ends the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol standby process.

The special action timer is updated every 4 ms in other processes in the game control timer interrupt process. The special symbol 1 change start command that is set also includes information on the type of special symbol (that it is special symbol 1) and information on the results of the special symbol change pattern determination performed in the special symbol 1 change pattern determination process (S1610) (information on the special symbol change pattern, including the presence or absence of a reach and information on the special symbol change time).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special chart 1 display 81a to start displaying the variation of the special chart 1 based on the special chart variation time corresponding to the special chart 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (memory area) of the various counter values in the special chart 1 reserved memory unit 105a from the current position to the side to be read, and performs a special chart 1 reserved memory unit shift process to clear the memory area corresponding to the first reserved item in the special chart 1 reserved memory unit 105a (the memory area farthest from the side to be read) (S1612). In this way, the special chart 1 reserved items are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the special chart 1 reserved number counter by "1" (S1613), decreases the special chart 1 reserved number indicated by the special chart 1 reserved display 83a by "1" (S1614), and changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), it turns the customer waiting flag OFF (S1617) and ends the special pattern waiting process, and if it is not ON (NO in S1616), it ends the special pattern waiting process without executing step S1617.

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, if there is one or more memories of special chart 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning at the second starting port 12, a special chart 2 judgment process (S1602) and a special chart 2 fluctuation pattern judgment process (S1603) are performed. The special chart 2 judgment process (S1602) and the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern judgment process (S1603) are basically the same processing content as the special chart 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern judgment process (S1610).

The special chart 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same as the special chart 1 determination process (S1609), except that the table used in the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used in the jackpot pattern type determination is the second jackpot pattern type determination table, so a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the special chart 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the same as the special chart 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610), except that the table used in the special chart 2 variation pattern determination is the special chart 2 variation pattern determination table, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special chart 2 display 81b to start displaying the variation of the special chart 2 based on the special chart variation time corresponding to the special chart variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (memory area) of the various counter values in the special chart 2 reserved memory unit 105b from the current position to the side to be read, and performs a special chart 2 reserved memory unit shift process to clear the memory area corresponding to the fourth reserved item in the special chart 2 reserved memory unit 105b (the memory area farthest from the side to be read) (S1605). In this way, the special chart 2 reserved items are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 decrements the special chart 2 reserved number counter by "1" (S1606), changes the special chart 2 reserved number indicated by the special chart 2 reserved display 83b by decreasing it by "1" (S1607), changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615), and proceeds to step S1616.

As described above, in the basic embodiment, the display of the special pattern based on the reserved special pattern 1 is performed only when the reserved special pattern 2 is "0" (YES in S1601). In other words, the consumption of the reserved special pattern 2 is executed in priority to the consumption of the reserved special pattern 1. And in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the reserved special pattern 2 is more likely to result in a winning pattern that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the reserved special pattern 1. Note that the consumption of the reserved special pattern 1 may be executed in priority to the consumption of the reserved special pattern 2. Also, the consumption of the reserved special pattern 1 and the reserved special pattern 2 may be executed in the order in which the reservations were generated, regardless of the type of the special pattern.

[Special pattern change processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to Fig. 41. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is to be terminated, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special operation counter = 0) (S1701). If the special symbol variation display is not to be terminated (NO in S1701), the special symbol variation process is terminated, and if the special symbol variation display is to be terminated (YES in S1701), the special symbol display unit 81 is caused to terminate the special symbol variation display and to stop display the special symbol according to the symbol data (jackpot symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 (S1702).

Next, a preset special pattern determination time (e.g., 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), a special pattern change stop command indicating that the special pattern change display is to end is set in the output buffer (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special pattern change processing is terminated.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to Fig. 42. In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stopped display of the special symbol, that is, whether or not the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special operation counter = 0) (S1751). If the stopped display of the special symbol is not to be ended (NO in S1751), the special symbol determination process is ended, and if the stopped display of the special symbol is to be ended (YES in S1751), it determines whether or not the current state is a normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), it proceeds to step S1757, and if currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it determines whether or not it is in the time-saving state (time-saving flag is ON) (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the time-saving state (NO in S1753), it proceeds to step S1757, and if currently in the time-saving state (YES in S1753), it subtracts "1" from the value of the time-saving remaining number counter that measures the remaining number of times (time-saving remaining number) that the variable display of the special pattern that can be executed in the time-saving state is performed (S1754), and it determines whether or not the value of the time-saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining time-saving counter (remaining time-saving times) is not "0" (NO in S1755), proceed to step S1757; if the value of the remaining time-saving counter (remaining time-saving times) is "0" (YES in S1755), transition from the time-saving state to a non-time-saving state (turn off the time-saving flag) (S1756), and proceed to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating that game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the currently displayed stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol or not (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), the special action status is changed to "1" (S1762), and the special symbol determination process is completed. If it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), the game state is reset (the normal game state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are turned OFF, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time-saving remaining number counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that an opening corresponding to the stopped jackpot symbol is in progress is turned ON in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the time from the start of the jackpot game to the start of one round) is set in the special operation timer according to the type of jackpot symbol. Furthermore, an opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 according to the type of jackpot symbol. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped jackpot symbol is to start.

6. Control of the performance by the performance control board 120 [Main processing for performance control]
Next, the control of the performance by the performance control board 120 will be described using the flowcharts of Figures 43 to 47. The flowcharts for controlling the performance described below are only examples. The execution order of the multiple processes in the flowcharts can be changed as appropriate or executed in parallel, as long as no contradiction occurs in the process contents.

The counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the following description of the control of presentation by the presentation control board 120 are provided in the presentation RAM 124. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY, the presentation control microcomputer 121 provided in the presentation control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the presentation ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, the main performance control process first performs power-on processing in response to power-on (S4001). The power-on processing includes, for example, setting the performance CPU 122, and setting the SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update processing (S4003), the values of various random number counters for determining effects are updated to make judgments regarding various effects. Note that the random numbers for determining effects include various random numbers for determining the content of effects, such as random numbers for determining stopping pattern patterns, which will be described later, and random numbers for determining special pattern variation effect patterns.

As an example, the method of updating the random number counter for determining various effects can be the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number value may be incremented by 2 instead of incremented by 1. This is also the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands (such as the special chart change performance start command, customer waiting start command, opening performance start command, round performance start command, and ending performance start command described below) stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 are transmitted to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140, which has received the command, displays an image on the display unit 50a in accordance with the received command (executing various effects using images). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 140, the effect control board 120 also outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executing various effects using sound), lights up the frame lamp 53 via the sub-drive board 162 (executing various effects using light), and operates the movable board 55k (executing various effects using operation). The various effects include special chart change effects, big win game effects (big win opening effects, round effects, big win ending effects), customer waiting effects, operation effects, and pre-reading effects.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits interrupts (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, it becomes possible to execute reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012). The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The receiving interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a strobe signal, i.e., any of the various commands sent from the gaming control board 100, is input to the external INT input section of the performance control microcomputer 121. In the receiving interrupt process (S4010), the performance control microcomputer 121 stores the various commands sent and received by the output process (S101) of the gaming control board 100 in the receiving buffer of the performance RAM 124. This receiving interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 1 msec period is input to the performance control board 120. In the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), the performance control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101). In the input processing, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates first performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the first performance button sensor 41a. The performance control microcomputer 121 creates second performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the second performance button sensor 42a.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output processing, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs the light emission data created in the light emission data creation processing (S4203) in the 10 ms timer interrupt processing described below to the sub-drive board 162 in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the image-based performance, etc. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs movable device control processing (S4103). In the movable device control processing, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the board movable body 55k) to drive the board movable body 55k at a predetermined timing. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operating mode according to the drive data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124 (described later) are updated in order to manage and control the time related to various specified performances. In this process, the timers provided in the performance RAM 124 are updated by 1 msec.

Then, the performance control microcontroller 121 performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec period is input to the performance control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process (S4201) to analyze the commands stored in the receive buffer in step S4010. The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the basic embodiment described later.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs audio control processing (S4202). In the audio control processing, audio data (data that controls the audio output from the speaker 52) is created and output to the audio control circuit 161 based on the performance content indicated by the special chart change performance data set in the performance RAM 124.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the performance content indicated by the special chart variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124.

[Received command analysis process]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to Figures 46 and 47. In the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not it has stored the start winning command in the receiving buffer (S4301). If the performance control microcomputer 121 has received a start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received a start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs start winning processing in response to the game ball winning in the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12. In the start winning processing, the received start winning command is stored in the start winning command reservation memory unit 125 in the performance RAM 124. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance indicating the expected probability of a jackpot. The look-ahead performance includes a reservation change notice that displays the reservation icon in a special manner, as well as a continuous notice performance that is performed over multiple consecutive changes in the display of special patterns. If it is decided to execute these look-ahead performances, a look-ahead performance start command for executing the determined performance is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

When the look-ahead performance start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads a specified performance image from the image ROM 142 and performs a look-ahead performance by image on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the look-ahead performance by image is being performed by the image control board 140, the performance control microcomputer 121 can output sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (perform a look-ahead performance by sound) according to the look-ahead performance content indicated by the look-ahead performance start command sent to the image control board 140, and can also light up the frame lamp 53 via the sub-drive board 162 (perform a look-ahead performance by light emission) and operate the board movable body 55k (perform a look-ahead performance by operation).

In step S4303, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not it has received a symbol designation command from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not it has stored the symbol designation command in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received a symbol designation command (NO in S4303), it proceeds to step S4305, whereas if it has received a symbol designation command (YES in S4303), it stores the symbol designation command in the symbol designation command memory unit 126 in the performance RAM 124 (S4304).

In step S4305, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a special chart change start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special chart change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special chart change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307. On the other hand, if the special chart change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the performance content of the special chart change performance is determined, and special chart change performance start processing (S4306) is performed to start the special chart change performance.

In the special symbol variation performance start process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first stores a special symbol variation start command in the special symbol variation start command memory unit 127 in the performance RAM 124. Next, based on the contents of the stopped special symbol (type of big win symbol, losing special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, a stop symbol pattern determination table is selected for performing stop symbol determination for determining the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special symbols and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stopped special symbol and special symbol variation pattern. In each stopping pattern determination table, the values of the random numbers for determining the stopping pattern pattern (stopping pattern determination values) are allocated to the multiple performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 so as to achieve a predetermined allocation rate (%). Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 obtains the value indicated by the random number counter for determining the stopping pattern pattern as a random number for determining the stopping pattern pattern, and performs a stopping pattern determination based on the obtained random number for determining the stopping pattern pattern.

In determining the stop symbol pattern, the performance control microcomputer 121 checks the acquired random number for determining the stop symbol pattern against the selected stop symbol pattern table, determines the performance symbols EZ1-EZ3 and small symbols KZ1-KZ3 to be displayed, and sets data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1-EZ3 and small symbols KZ1-KZ3 in a specified area of the performance RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a no-reach miss variation, a combination of the performance symbols EZ1-EZ3 and small symbols KZ1-KZ3 is selected to produce a so-called "varied pattern." Also, if the special symbol variation pattern is a reach miss variation, a combination of the performance symbols EZ1-EZ3 and small symbols KZ1-KZ3 is selected so that the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3 are the same, and the center performance symbol EZ2 is different from them. Furthermore, if the special pattern variation is a jackpot variation, a combination of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 is selected to produce a so-called "double number" according to the performance mode and the type of jackpot pattern.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects a special chart change performance pattern determination table for performing a special chart change performance pattern determination for determining a special chart change performance pattern associated with the performance content of the special chart change performance based on the currently-present performance mode and the special chart change pattern indicated by the special chart change start command. A plurality of special chart change performance pattern determination tables are provided in association with the performance mode and the special chart change pattern. Thus, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one special chart change performance pattern determination table associated with the special chart change pattern. In each special chart change performance pattern determination table, the value of the special chart change performance pattern determination random number (special chart change performance pattern determination value) is allocated to one or more special chart change performance patterns so as to achieve a predetermined allocation rate (%). Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the special chart change performance pattern determination random number counter as a special chart change performance pattern determination random number, and performs a special chart change performance pattern determination based on the acquired special chart change performance pattern determination random number.

When determining the special chart change performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 121 compares the acquired random number for determining the special chart change performance pattern with the selected special chart change performance pattern table, determines the special chart change performance pattern, sets data representing the determined special chart change performance pattern (special chart change performance pattern data) in a specified area of the performance RAM 124, and sets a special chart change performance start command indicating the special chart change performance pattern in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

When the special chart change performance start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads a specified performance image from the image ROM 142 and performs a special chart change performance using an image on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

The special chart change performance start command also includes information about the performance flow associated with the special chart change pattern indicated by the special chart change start command. In addition to the special chart change performance by image performed by the image display device 50, the special chart change performance by sound output from the speaker 52, the performance content of the special chart change performance by light emission by the frame lamp 53, and the performance content of the special chart change performance by the operation performed by the board movable body 55k are also included in the special chart change performance start command.

In addition, while the special chart change performance by image is being performed by the image control board 140, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes the special chart change performance by sound) according to the special chart change performance content indicated by the special chart change performance start command sent to the image control board 140, and also causes the frame lamp 53 to light up via the sub-drive board 162 (executes the special chart change performance by light emission), and operates the board movable body 55k (executes the special chart change performance by movement).

In step S4307, the performance control microcomputer 121 judges whether or not a special chart change stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special chart change stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the special chart change stop command (NO in S4307), it proceeds to step S4309, whereas if it has received the special chart change stop command (YES in S4307), it performs special chart change performance end processing (S4308) to end the special chart change performance (stopping the change display of performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small patterns KZ1 to KZ3 and performing a stop display).

In the special chart change performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special chart change stop command, and based on the analysis results, sets a special chart change performance end command in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 to appropriately end the special chart change performance (stop the changing display of performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small patterns KZ1 to KZ3). When the image control board 140 receives the special chart change performance end command, it ends the special chart change performance that is being executed (stops the changing performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and small patterns KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a game status command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game status command has been stored in the receiving buffer. If the presentation control microcomputer 121 has not received a game status command (NO in S4309), it proceeds to step S4311. If the presentation control microcomputer 121 has received a game status command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the game status command to identify the game status represented by the game status command and performs a game status setting process to set the game status (S4310).

In the game state setting process, the presentation control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the presentation RAM 124. For example, if the game state indicated by the game state command is a normal game state, the presentation control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag "00H" in the game state flag area of the presentation RAM 124. Also, if the game state indicated by the game state command is a high probability high base game state, the presentation control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag "01H" in the game state flag area of the presentation RAM 124. Furthermore, if the game state indicated by the game state command is a low probability high base game state, the presentation control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag "02H" in the game state flag area of the presentation RAM 124.

In step S4311, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received a customer waiting command (NO in S4311), it proceeds to step S4313, whereas if it has received a customer waiting command (YES in S4311), it performs customer waiting performance standby processing (S4312) and ends the received command analysis processing.

In the customer waiting performance standby process, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time from when the performance pattern is stopped to when the customer waiting performance starts (customer waiting performance standby time: for example, 30 seconds) in the customer waiting performance timer. The performance control microcomputer 121 can determine whether this standby time has elapsed, and if it determines that the standby time has elapsed, it sets a customer waiting performance start command to start the customer waiting performance in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4313, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command has been stored in the receiving buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received an opening command (NO in S4313), it proceeds to step S4315, whereas if it has received an opening command (YES in S4313), it performs jackpot opening performance start processing associated with the start of the opening of the jackpot game (S4314).

In the jackpot opening performance start process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command and, based on the analysis result, determines whether or not to execute a jackpot opening performance corresponding to the opening of the jackpot game that is about to be executed, and if so, selects the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern), and sets a jackpot opening performance start command to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 to start the jackpot opening performance with the selected jackpot opening performance pattern.

In step S4315, the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a round number designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, whereas if the round number designation command has been received (YES in S4315), the round presentation start process associated with the start of round play is performed (S4316).

In the round performance start process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command and determines whether or not to execute a round performance corresponding to the round game that is about to start, and if so, selects the performance content of the round performance (round performance pattern) and sets the round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4317, the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command has been stored in the receiving buffer. If an ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process ends. On the other hand, if an ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending presentation start process (S4318) associated with the start of the ending of the jackpot game and the presentation mode setting process (S4319) are performed before the received command analysis process ends.

In the jackpot ending presentation start process, the presentation control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot ending presentation that corresponds to the ending of the jackpot game that is about to be executed, and if so, selects the presentation content of the jackpot ending presentation (jackpot ending presentation pattern) and sets the jackpot ending presentation start command that corresponds to the selected jackpot ending presentation pattern in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124.

In addition, in the presentation mode setting process, the presentation control microcomputer 121 performs a process to set the presentation mode after a jackpot game (a process to control the presentation mode) based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot pattern indicated by the ending command.

For example, when the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot pattern A or jackpot pattern D, the presentation control microcomputer 121 sets the probability variable presentation mode, which indicates a high probability, high base game state. Then, a presentation mode flag indicating the probability variable presentation mode is turned ON in a specified area of the presentation RAM 124, and a probability variable presentation mode start command indicating that the probability variable presentation mode is set is set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124. When the probability variable presentation mode start command set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the probability variable background image G120 as the background image at the timing when the ending ends, and outputs the probability variable BGM as the BGM.

When the jackpot pattern indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot pattern B, jackpot pattern C, or jackpot pattern E, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a time-saving performance mode in which it is difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability high base game state or a low probability high base game state. The performance control microcomputer 121 then turns on a performance mode flag indicating the time-saving performance mode in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and sets a time-saving performance mode start command indicating that the time-saving performance mode is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. When the time-saving performance mode start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image control CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the time-saving background image G130 as the background image and outputs the time-saving BGM as the BGM at the timing when the ending ends.

First Embodiment
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the first embodiment will be mainly described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as the basic embodiment or the similar corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the special chart 1 variation pattern determination table for determining the special chart 1 variation pattern in the non-time-saving state differs from the special chart 1 variation pattern determination table in the non-time-saving state described in the basic embodiment. An example of the configuration of the special chart 1 variation pattern determination table in the non-time-saving state according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 48. As shown in FIG. 48, the special chart 1 variation patterns that can be determined in the non-time-saving state include THP01 to THP04 for jackpot variations, THP11 to THP15 for reach/miss variations, and THP21 to THP23 for no-reach variations.

In the case of a jackpot, there is a 20% chance that it will be determined to be THP01, a 10% chance that it will be determined to be THP02, a 65% chance that it will be determined to be THP03, and a 5% chance that it will be determined to be THP04.

In the case of a miss with a reach, there is a 3% chance that the THP will be 11, a 2% chance that the THP will be 12, a 10% chance that the THP will be 13, a 30% chance that the THP will be 14, and a 55% chance that the THP will be 15.

If there is no reach and there is a miss and there are 0-2 reserved special charts 1, there is an 80% chance that it will be determined to be THP21, a 15% chance that it will be determined to be THP22, and a 5% chance that it will be determined to be THP23. On the other hand, if there is no reach and there is a miss and there are 3-4 reserved special charts 1, there is a 5% chance that it will be determined to be THP21, a 10% chance that it will be determined to be THP22, and a 85% chance that it will be determined to be THP23.

Also, as shown in FIG. 48, in addition to the normal fluctuation, reach, N reach, L reach, and SP reach described in the basic embodiment, there is also the SPSP reach as a performance (performance flow constituting performance) that constitutes the performance flow of the special chart fluctuation performance based on the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern in the non-time-saving state.

The SPSP reach can be performed both when there is a jackpot and when there is a miss, and is a presentation that indicates whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, suggesting that there is a possibility that a jackpot gaming state will occur. In more detail, the SPSP reach is a presentation that indicates that there is a higher possibility of a jackpot gaming state occurring than the SP reach.

In addition, the SPSP reach can be executed in a progressive manner from the L reach. In other words, when a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the L reach, the L reach switches to the SPSP reach. Similarly, the SPSP reach can be executed in a progressive manner from the SP reach. In other words, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the SP reach switches to the SPSP reach.

In addition, in an SPSP reach, the L reach that was executed before the SPSP reach was executed or the reach that was established in the SP reach is maintained as is. However, in response to switching to an SPSP reach, the reach performance symbol related to the previous L reach or SP reach may change (be promoted) to one that indicates a relatively high possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state. In other words, it may change from a so-called "blue symbol" to a so-called "red symbol."

Furthermore, in the following, the point in time when L reach switches from L reach to SPSP reach is referred to as the "L reach SPSP development point." Similarly, the point in time when SP reach switches from SP reach to SPSP reach is referred to as the "SP reach SPSP development point." Note that the L reach SPSP development point belongs to the middle of the L reach, and is an earlier point than the win/lose branch point for the L reach. Similarly, the SP reach SPSP development point belongs to the middle of the SP reach, and is an earlier point than the win/lose branch point for the SP reach.

In the SPSP reach, a background image dedicated to the SPSP reach (background image for SPSP reach) G116 is displayed across the entire display unit 50a. The specific display content of the background image for SPSP reach G116 can be set as appropriate, but in the first embodiment, the background image for SPSP reach G116 is composed of a 3DCG video. A specific story (specific story) is associated with the video that constitutes the background image for SPSP reach G116. This specific story is set in such a way that the director of the main character worked for a company before becoming the director, and is mainly composed of recollections of the director's work when he was working for the company. In the following, the specific story related to the background image for SPSP reach G116 may also be referred to as the "specific story".

The background image G116 for the SPSP reach is configured in the same way as the background image G115 for the SP reach and the background image G114 for the L reach. As the specific story progresses in the background image G116 for the SPSP reach, a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point") is reached at the final stage of the SPSP reach, where either a performance suggesting a jackpot (a jackpot suggestion performance) or a performance suggesting a miss (a miss suggestion performance) is executed. Then, in the case of a jackpot fluctuation (long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP jackpot fluctuation), a jackpot suggestion performance exclusive to the SPSP reach is executed, and then the display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a jackpot is performed. On the other hand, in the case of a miss fluctuation (long SPSP miss fluctuation, short SPSP miss fluctuation), a miss suggestion performance exclusive to the SPSP reach is executed, and then the display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a miss is performed.

In the first embodiment, the time from when the SPSP reach begins until it reaches the winning/losing branch point is approximately 60 seconds, which is set to be longer than the time from when the SP reach or L reach begins until it reaches the winning/losing branch point.

Next, we will explain the flow of special chart change presentation (presentation flow) based on each special chart change pattern.

In the special chart change performance based on THP21 to THP23, normal changes occur, each with a different performance time, and the special chart change performance ends with that normal change.

In the special chart change performance based on THP13, a reach is achieved after the normal change, and after the reach is achieved, an N reach is executed, and the special chart change performance ends with the N reach.

In special chart change performances based on THP01 and THP11, a normal change is performed first, and then a reach is established. After the reach is established, an N reach is performed, which develops into an SP reach. Then, the SP reach is performed until the middle (mid-game), and when it becomes the SP reach SPSP development point, it develops into an SPSP reach, and the SPSP reach is performed to the end, and the special chart change performance ends with the SPSP reach.

In special chart change performances based on THP02 and THP12, a normal change is performed first, and then a reach is established. After the reach is established, an N reach is performed, which develops into an L reach. Then, when the L reach is performed halfway (mid-game) and the L reach develops into an SPSP reach, the SPSP reach is performed to the end, and the special chart change performance ends with the SPSP reach.

In special chart change performances based on THP03 and THP13, a normal change is performed first, and then a reach is established. After the reach is established, an N reach is performed, which develops into an SP reach. The SP reach is then performed to the end, and the special chart change performance ends with the SP reach.

In special chart change performances based on THP04 and THP14, a normal change is performed first, and then a reach is established. After the reach is established, an N reach is performed, which develops into an L reach. The L reach is then performed to the end, and the special chart change performance ends with the L reach.

In the first embodiment, the various special chart fluctuation patterns (THP01 to THP04, THP11 to THP15, and THP21 to THP23) are given names as shown in the second item from the right in the example configuration of the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table in Figure 48, "Name of special chart fluctuation pattern." For example, the special chart fluctuation pattern "THP01" of a jackpot that develops from an SP reach to an SPSP reach is called a "long SPSP jackpot fluctuation", the special chart fluctuation pattern "THP02" of a jackpot that develops from an L reach to an SPSP reach is called a "short SPSP jackpot fluctuation", the special chart fluctuation pattern "THP11" of a miss that develops from an SP reach to an SPSP reach is called a "long SPSP miss fluctuation", and the special chart fluctuation pattern "THP12" of a miss that develops from an L reach to an SPSP reach is called a "short SPSP miss fluctuation".

Furthermore, the jackpot fluctuations related to the SPSP reach (long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP jackpot fluctuation) are collectively referred to as "SPSP jackpot fluctuation", and the miss fluctuations related to the SPSP reach (long SPS miss fluctuation, short SPSP miss fluctuation) are collectively referred to as "SPSP miss fluctuation". In addition, the special chart fluctuation patterns related to the SPSP reach (SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SPSP miss fluctuation) are collectively referred to as "SPSP reach fluctuation".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, in the normal game state and in the special chart change presentation in the normal presentation mode, apart from presentation flow configuration presentations such as reach and various reach presentations, a specific presentation that suggests that the player may be in a favorable game state, in other words, a specific presentation whose execution increases the player's chances of being in a favorable game state, may be executed on the display unit 50a.

There are three types of special effects: first, second, and third. The first special effect is performed during normal fluctuations. The second special effect is performed during N reaches. The third special effect is performed during the period before the L reach SPSP development point during an L reach, and during the period before the SP reach SPSP development point during an SP reach.

The first, second, and third specific performances differ from each other in terms of their content, but they all have in common that they are all composed of image displays involving the director of the main character.

Specific examples of the various special effects will be described later, but in the first special effect, an image (first special effect image) G51 associated with the first special effect is displayed on the display unit 50a, in the second special effect, an image (second special effect image) G52 associated with the second special effect is displayed on the display unit 50a, and in the third special effect, an image (third special effect image) G53 associated with the third special effect is displayed on the display unit 50a.

The first specific performance image G51 is composed of a still image showing the director character toasting with a wine glass. The second specific performance image G52 is composed of a video showing the director character playing kendama. The third specific performance image G53 is composed of a still image showing the director character encouraging the main character (A-Taro) by saying, "Do your best, A-Taro!".

As mentioned above, the SPSP reach background image G116 displayed during the SPSP reach displays an image in which the manager character reminisces about his time working for a company, but the SPSP reach and the various special effects are similar in that they are composed of image displays and the manager character is included in the image. Therefore, in the following, the SPSP reach and the various special effects may be collectively referred to as "manager effects." Also, the various manager effects function as effects that suggest that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state being reached in the pachinko game machine PY1 (increasing the chances of reaching a favorable game state), but more specifically, they function as effects that suggest that there is a high possibility of a jackpot game state being reached (greatly increasing the chances of reaching a favorable game state).

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the director's performance is executed in the special chart variation performance, it may be executed once or twice. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the possibility of entering the jackpot gaming state suggested by the various director's performances is high, but if the director's performance is executed twice in one special chart variation performance, the possibility of entering the jackpot gaming state is extremely high. In other words, the execution of the director's performance twice suggests that the possibility of entering the jackpot gaming state is extremely high.

Furthermore, basically, when a director's direction is executed regardless of the type, a premonition direction is executed to suggest that a director's direction will be executed. The premonition direction is composed of an image displayed on the display unit 50a. In the premonition direction, an image (premonition direction image) G50 associated with the premonition direction is displayed on the display unit 50a. The premonition direction image G50 is composed of a still image with the word "director" displayed inside a white circle.

In the first embodiment, whether the director's performance is executed once or twice in one special chart change performance, the premonition performance is executed only once. Therefore, the execution of one premonition performance generally notifies the execution of the director's performance, and this notification includes a notification of one execution of the director's performance and a notification of two executions of the director's performance.

Next, the execution timing of various director effects and the execution timing of premonition effects will be explained. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram explaining the execution timing of various director effects and the execution timing of premonition effects in long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, long SPSP miss fluctuation, short SPSP miss fluctuation, SP miss fluctuation, and L miss fluctuation. In FIG. 49, timing S, timing T, timing U, timing V, timing W, and timing X related to the director effects described later are plotted with downward white triangular arrows while being written as "S", "T", "U", "V", "W", and "X". In addition, timing A, timing B, timing C, timing D, timing E, and timing F related to the premonition effects described later are plotted with downward black triangular arrows while being written as "A", "B", "C", "D", "E", and "F".

The first specific effect is executed in the normal fluctuation (special chart fluctuation effect) of the long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, long SPSP miss fluctuation, short SPSP miss fluctuation, SP miss fluctuation, and L miss fluctuation. In detail, the performance time of the first specific effect is 2 seconds, and the first specific effect starts when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the normal fluctuation.

The second specific effect is executed in the N reach of the long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, long SPSP miss fluctuation, short SPSP miss fluctuation, SP miss fluctuation, and L miss fluctuation. In detail, the performance time of the second specific effect is 5 seconds, and the second specific effect starts when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the N reach.

The third specific effect is executed in the SP reach of the long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SP jackpot fluctuation, long SPSP miss fluctuation, and SP miss fluctuation, as well as the L reach of the short SPSP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP miss fluctuation, and L miss fluctuation. In detail, the performance time of the third specific effect is 3 seconds. And, in the case of the long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SP jackpot fluctuation, long SPSP miss fluctuation, and SP miss fluctuation, the third specific effect starts when 15 seconds have passed since the start of the SP reach. On the other hand, in the case of the short SPSP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP miss fluctuation, and L miss fluctuation, the third specific effect starts when 8 seconds have passed since the start of the L reach.

The SPSP reach is executed in the long SPSP jackpot fluctuation and long SPSP miss fluctuation, as well as the short SPSP jackpot fluctuation and short SPSP miss fluctuation. In the case of the long SPSP jackpot fluctuation and long SPSP miss fluctuation, the SPSP reach starts when 30 seconds have passed since the SP reach started. In other words, the SPSP reach switches from the middle of the SP reach, in other words, it is executed in a progressive manner. On the other hand, in the case of the short SPSP jackpot fluctuation and short SPSP miss fluctuation, the SPSP reach starts when 15 seconds have passed since the L reach started. In other words, the SPSP reach switches from the middle of the L reach, in other words, it is executed in a progressive manner.

In the following, the timing at which various supervisory effects begin is sometimes referred to as "supervisory execution timing." The supervisory execution timing of the first specific effect is referred to as "timing S," the supervisory execution timing of the second specific effect is referred to as "timing T," the supervisory execution timing of the third specific effect related to an L reach is referred to as "timing U," the supervisory execution timing of the third specific effect related to an SP reach is referred to as "timing V," the supervisory execution timing of the SPSP reach related to an L reach is referred to as "timing W," and the supervisory execution timing of the SPSP reach related to an SP reach is referred to as "timing X."

The content of the third specific effect when executed with an L reach is the same as that of the third specific effect when executed with an SP reach, but below, the third specific effect executed with an L reach is sometimes referred to as the "third specific effect (L)" and the third specific effect executed with an SP reach is sometimes referred to as the "third specific effect (SP)". The content of the SPSP reach executed in a progressive manner from an L reach is the same as that of the SPSP reach executed in a progressive manner from an SP reach, but below, the SPSP reach executed in a progressive manner from an L reach is sometimes referred to as the "SPSP reach (L)" and the SPSP reach executed in a progressive manner from an SP reach is sometimes referred to as the "SPSP reach (SP)".

On the other hand, multiple timings are set for the start of the premonition effect. In the following, the timings for the start of the premonition effect are sometimes referred to as "premonition execution timings." Timing A, timing B, timing C, timing D, timing E, and timing F are set as the premonition execution timings.

Timing A is the point where 1 second has passed since the start of the normal fluctuation (special chart fluctuation performance), in other words, 2 seconds before timing S. Timing B is the point where 3 seconds have passed since the start of the N reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing T. Timing C is the point where 6 seconds have passed since the start of the L reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing U. Timing D is the point where 13 seconds have passed since the start of the SP reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing V. Timing E is the point where 13 seconds have passed since the start of the L reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing V. Timing F is the point where 28 seconds have passed since the start of the SP reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing W. The performance duration of the premonition performance is set to 2 seconds.

As mentioned above, the director's direction may be executed once or twice in one special chart change direction. When the director's direction is executed once (director's direction once pattern), there are a pattern in which the first specific direction is executed (director's direction once pattern 1), a pattern in which the second specific direction is executed (director's direction once pattern 2), a pattern in which the third specific direction (L) is executed (director's direction once pattern 3), a pattern in which the third specific direction (SP) is executed (director's direction once pattern 4), a pattern in which the SPSP reach (L) is executed (director's direction once pattern 5), and a pattern in which the SPSP reach (SP) is executed (director's direction once pattern 6). On the other hand, as patterns when the director's direction is executed twice (director's direction twice patterns), there are a pattern in which the first specific direction and the second specific direction are executed (director's direction twice pattern 1), a pattern in which the first specific direction and the third specific direction (L) are executed (director's direction twice pattern 2), a pattern in which the first specific direction and the third specific direction (SP) are executed (director's direction twice pattern 3), a pattern in which the first specific direction and the SPSP reach (L) are executed (director's direction twice pattern 4), a pattern in which the first specific direction and the SPSP reach (SP) are executed (director's direction twice pattern 5), and a pattern in which the second specific direction and the third specific direction are executed (director's direction twice pattern 6). There are patterns in which a fixed effect (L) is executed (director-directed twice pattern 6), a pattern in which a second specific effect and a third specific effect (SP) are executed (director-directed twice pattern 7), a pattern in which a second specific effect and an SPSP reach (L) are executed (director-directed twice pattern 8), a pattern in which a second specific effect and an SPSP reach (SP) are executed (director-directed twice pattern 9), a pattern in which a third specific effect (L) and an SPSP reach (L) are executed (director-directed twice pattern 10), and a pattern in which a third specific effect (SP) and an SPSP reach (SP) are executed (director-directed twice pattern 11).

The timing at which the premonition effect can start (be executed) is associated with the pattern in which the director's effect is executed (one director's effect pattern, two director's effect pattern).

In director-directed once pattern 1, the execution timing at which the premonition effect can start (execute) is timing A. In director-directed once pattern 2, the execution timings at which the premonition effect can start (execute) are timing A and timing B. In director-directed once pattern 3, the execution timings at which the premonition effect can start (execute) are timing A, timing B, and timing C. In director-directed once pattern 4, the execution timings at which the premonition effect can start (execute) are timing A, timing B, and timing D. In director-directed once pattern 5, the execution timings at which the premonition effect can start (execute) are timing A, timing B, timing C, and timing E. In director-directed once pattern 6, the execution timings at which the premonition effect can start (execute) are timing A, timing B, timing D, and timing F.

In director-directed twice pattern 1, the execution timing at which the premonition effect can start (execute) is timing A. In director-directed twice pattern 2, the execution timing at which the premonition effect can start (execute) is timing A. In director-directed twice pattern 3, the execution timing at which the premonition effect can start (execute) is timing A. In director-directed twice pattern 4, the execution timing at which the premonition effect can start (execute) is timing A. In director-directed twice pattern 5, the execution timing at which the premonition effect can start (execute) is timing A. In director-directed twice pattern 6, the execution timing at which the premonition effect can start (execute) is timing A. In director-directed twice pattern 7, the execution timings at which the premonition effect can start (execute) are timing A and timing B. In director-directed twice pattern 8, the execution timings at which the premonition effect can start (execute) are timing A and timing B. In director-directed twice pattern 9, the execution timing at which the premonition effect can start (execute) is timing A and timing B. In director's two-times direction pattern 10, the execution timings at which premonition effects can start (execute) are timing A, timing B, and timing C. In director's two-times direction pattern 11, the execution timings at which premonition effects can start (execute) are timing A, timing B, and timing D.

In this way, if a director effect is executed once in one special chart change performance, the premonition effect will always be executed before that. Also, if a director effect is executed twice in one special chart change performance, the premonition effect will always be executed before the first director effect.

In addition, the premonition execution timing is set two seconds before the supervised execution timing of the various supervised effects, and the performance time of the premonition effects is two seconds, so if the premonition effect is executed at the premonition execution timing immediately preceding the supervised execution timing of the various supervised effects, the premonition effect and the supervised effect will be executed continuously and integrally. Therefore, in the following, the premonition execution timing immediately preceding the supervised execution timing of the various supervised effects will be referred to as the "supervised effect corresponding premonition execution timing." Therefore, the supervised effect corresponding premonition execution timing of the first specific effect is timing A, the supervised effect corresponding premonition execution timing of the second specific effect is timing B, the supervised effect corresponding premonition execution timing of the third specific effect (L) is timing C, the supervised effect corresponding premonition execution timing of the third specific effect (SP) is timing D, the supervised effect corresponding premonition execution timing of the SPSP reach (L) is timing E, and the supervised effect corresponding premonition execution timing of the SPSP reach (SP) is timing F.

Next, specific examples of premonition effects and director effects will be described. Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a premonition effect, Figure 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first specific effect, Figure 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a second specific effect, Figure 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a third specific effect (L), Figure 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a third specific effect (SP), Figure 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a SPSP reach (L), and Figure 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a SPSP reach (SP).

As mentioned above, the premonition effect can start at various times (timing A to timing F). For example, when the premonition effect is executed at timing A (one second after the start of the normal variation (special pattern variation effect)), the display patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that had been displayed in a stopped state until then start to vary as shown in FIG. 50(A). When one second has passed since the display patterns EZ1 to EZ3 start to vary as shown in FIG. 50(B), the entire display unit 50a turns white and a large premonition effect image G50 is displayed in the center of the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 50(B). Since the premonition effect lasts for two seconds, the premonition effect ends when two seconds have passed since the premonition effect started. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the premonition effect image G50 disappears and the entire display unit 50a returns to its original state. However, when the first specific effect is executed after the premonition effect, the first specific effect image G51 is displayed as it is, instead of returning to the original background image as shown in FIG. 50(C).

The first specific effect starts at timing S in normal variation. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(A), when the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a changing manner superimposed on the first normal background image G111, at timing S, the first specific effect image G51 is cut in across the entire display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 51(B). Since the performance time of the first specific effect is two seconds, the first specific effect ends two seconds after it starts. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the first specific effect image G51 disappears and the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the changing effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed superimposed on the first normal background image G111.

The second specific effect starts at timing T in the N reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(A), when the N reach is being executed superimposed on the first normal background image G111, at timing T, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the second specific effect image G52 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. As described above, the second specific effect image G52 is composed of a video showing the manager character playing Kendama, so as shown in, for example, FIG. 52(B) to FIG. 52(D), the video of the manager character playing Kendama is displayed as the second specific effect image G52 on the entire display unit 50a. Since the performance time of the second specific effect is 5 seconds, the second specific effect ends 5 seconds after the start of the second specific effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(E), the second specific effect image G52 disappears, the entire display unit 50a turns white, the N reach ends, and then it develops (switches) to L reach or SP reach.

The third specific performance (L) starts at timing U in the L reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the background image G114 for L reach is displayed on the display unit 50a, and when a predetermined story related to the background image G114 for L reach progresses to the scene related to timing U, the third specific performance image G53 is cut in on the entire display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 53 (B). Since the performance time of the third specific performance is 3 seconds, the third specific performance ends when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the third specific performance. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the third specific performance image G53 disappears and the background image G114 for L reach is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Note that when the third specific performance image G53 is displayed, the display control of the background image G114 for L reach is proceeding inside the image control board 140. Therefore, when returning to the L reach background image G114, the video related to the L reach background image G114 will have progressed for the duration of the third specific effect.

The third specific performance (SP) starts at timing V in the SP reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(A), the background image G115 for SP reach is displayed on the display unit 50a, and when a predetermined story related to the background image G115 for SP reach progresses to the scene related to timing V, the third specific performance image G53 is cut in on the entire display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 54(B). Since the performance time of the third specific performance is 3 seconds, the third specific performance ends when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the third specific performance. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the third specific performance image G53 disappears and the background image G115 for SP reach is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Note that when the third specific performance image G53 is displayed, it is assumed that the display control of the background image G115 for SP reach is progressing inside the image control board 140. Therefore, when returning to the SP reach background image G115, the video (specific story) related to the SP reach background image G115 will have progressed for the duration of the third specific effect.

The SPSP reach (L) begins at timing W (time of L reach SPSP development) in the L reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(A), when an L reach background image G114 is displayed on the display unit 50a and a specific story related to the L reach background image G114 progresses to a scene related to timing W, first, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the entire display unit 50a is whited out, and then, as shown in FIG. 55(C), the SPSP reach background image G116 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Since the SPSP reach background image G116 is composed of a video of a specific story, the specific story is then developed on the entire display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 55(D).

The SPSP reach (SP) begins at timing X (the time when the SP reach develops into SPSP) in the SP reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(A), when a background image G115 for the SP reach is displayed on the display unit 50a and a specific story related to the background image G115 for the SP reach progresses to a scene related to timing X, first, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the entire display unit 50a is whited out, and then, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the background image G116 for the SPSP reach is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Since the background image G116 for the SPSP reach is composed of a video of a specific story, the specific story is then developed on the entire display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 56(D).

In the first embodiment, the special chart change effect related to the SPSP reach change ends when the SPSP reach is executed to the end. That is, when the SPSP reach starts, a specific story progresses in the background image G116 for the SPSP reach, and as described above, a winning/losing branch point is reached in the final stage. Then, in the case of a special chart change effect related to an SPSP big win change, a big win suggestion effect (not shown) is executed from the winning/losing branch point, and finally, the display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a big win is performed. On the other hand, in the case of a special chart change effect related to an SPSP loss change, a loss suggestion effect (not shown) is executed from the winning/losing branch point, and finally, the display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a loss is performed.

In addition, Figures 51 to 56 show specific examples of when various directorial effects are executed, but in all cases, the various directorial effects are executed without premonition effects being executed at the premonition timing corresponding to the directorial effects. If the premonition effects are executed at the premonition timing corresponding to the directorial effects of the various directorial effects and then the directorial effects are executed, the various directorial effects will start just as the premonition effects end, but as shown in Figure 50(B), the situation in which the premonition effect image G50 is displayed on the display unit 50a is connected to the start of the various directorial effects shown in Figures 51(B), 52(B), 53(B), 54(B), 55(B), and 56(B). In other words, the premonition effects and the various directorial effects are executed continuously and integrally on the display unit 50a.

Next, an example of the control content related to the director's direction and premonition effects will be explained. Note that the control content explained below is an example of the control content related to the director's direction and premonition effects, and therefore the control content is not limited to the content below and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, in step S4306, when the game is in normal game mode and normal presentation mode, the presentation control microcomputer 121 checks the special chart 1 variation pattern.

When the special chart 1 variation pattern is a long SPSP jackpot variation or a long SPSP miss variation, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a special chart variation start command indicating the performance content in which the SPSP reach starts from the time of the SP reach SPSP development and the special chart variation performance ends with the SPSP reach in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Also, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is a short SPSP jackpot variation or a short SPSP miss variation, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a special chart variation start command indicating the performance content in which the SPSP reach starts from the time of the L reach SPSP development and the special chart variation performance ends with the SPSP reach in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the special chart change start command related to the L reach change, SP reach change, and SPSP reach change, and the special chart change performance data in the performance RAM 124, and then performs a specific performance judgment to determine whether or not a specific performance is to be executed, and the type of performance if a specific performance is to be executed.

The specific effect judgment is performed by referring to the specific effect judgment table. An example of the configuration of the specific effect judgment table is shown in FIG. 57. As shown in FIG. 57, the specific effect judgment table is associated with the special chart change pattern. Specifically, the specific effect judgment tables include a specific effect judgment table for long SPSP jackpot changes, a specific effect judgment table for short SPSP jackpot changes, a specific effect judgment table for SP jackpot changes, a specific effect judgment table for L jackpot changes, a specific effect judgment table for long SPSP miss changes, a specific effect judgment table for short SPSP miss changes, a specific effect judgment table for SP miss changes, and a specific effect judgment table for L miss changes.

As shown in FIG. 57, the judgment results of each specific performance judgment table are set to be a specific performance type and not to execute a specific performance. The specific performance type as a judgment result includes executing a specific performance. In other words, when a specific performance type is determined in a specific performance judgment based on the specific performance judgment table, the specific performance of that specific performance type will be executed in the special chart change performance that is about to start, whereas when it is determined that a specific performance will not be executed, the specific performance will not be executed in the special chart change performance that is about to start. Note that the "specific performance type" as a judgment result can be one type of specific performance type or two types of specific performance types. When two types are determined, the two determined types of specific performance will be executed in the special chart change performance that is about to start.

Each specific effect determination table shown in FIG. 57 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each specific effect type and for not executing a specific effect is the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 57. As shown in FIG. 57, any type of specific effect type may be determined not only in the case of a miss fluctuation but also in the case of a jackpot fluctuation. Therefore, each type of specific effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state, and is an effect that increases the chances of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the case of an SPSP reach fluctuation, two specific performance types are not selected. This is because in the first embodiment, the maximum number of times that a director's performance can be executed in one special chart fluctuation performance is two, and in the case of an SPSP reach fluctuation, an SPSP reach that constitutes a director's performance is always executed, and the number of times that a director's performance other than the SPSP reach can be executed is one.

Now, for the SP jackpot fluctuation and SP miss fluctuation, which are paired in the special chart fluctuation presentation flow, the selection rate for each type of specific presentation type is significantly higher for the SP jackpot fluctuation than for the SP miss fluctuation. Similarly, for the L jackpot fluctuation and L miss fluctuation, which are paired in the special chart fluctuation presentation flow, the selection rate for each type of specific presentation type is significantly higher for the L jackpot fluctuation than for the L miss fluctuation. Therefore, when a specific presentation is executed once in one special chart fluctuation presentation, regardless of the type of specific presentation, it can be said that the possibility of entering a jackpot game state is higher than usual.

Furthermore, for SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, the selection rate for one type of specific presentation type is higher overall than the selection rate for two types of specific presentation types. Similarly, for SP miss fluctuations and L miss fluctuations, the selection rate for one type of specific presentation type is higher overall than the selection rate for two types of specific presentation types. However, the ratio of the selection rate for two types of specific presentation types in SP miss fluctuations to the selection rate for one type of specific presentation type in SP jackpot fluctuations is much higher than the ratio of the selection rate for one type of specific presentation type in SP miss fluctuations to the selection rate for two types of specific presentation types in SP jackpot fluctuations. Similarly, the ratio of the selection rate for two types of specific presentation types in L miss fluctuations to the selection rate for one type of specific presentation type in L miss fluctuations is much higher than the ratio of the selection rate for one type of specific presentation type in L miss fluctuations to the selection rate for two types of specific presentation types in L jackpot fluctuations. Therefore, the possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state when a directorial effect other than SPSP reach is executed twice in a special chart change effect related to SP reach fluctuation or L reach is higher than the possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state when a directorial effect is executed once. In other words, when a directorial effect other than SPSP reach is executed twice in a special chart change effect related to SP reach fluctuation or L reach, the possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state is extremely high (the transition to a jackpot gaming state is highly likely).

In addition, the selection rate of one of each type of specific presentation type related to the SPSP jackpot fluctuation is extremely low compared to the selection rate of one of each type of specific presentation type related to the SPSP miss fluctuation. Therefore, the possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state when a director's presentation including an SPSP reach is executed twice in a special chart fluctuation presentation related to an SPSP reach fluctuation is higher than the possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state when a director's presentation including an SPSP reach is executed once. In other words, when a specific presentation is executed once in a special chart fluctuation presentation related to an SPSP reach fluctuation, in other words when a director's presentation including an SPSP reach is executed twice, the possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state is extremely high (the transition to a jackpot gaming state is highly likely).

As mentioned above, in the first embodiment, when a director's performance is executed, a premonition performance is executed before the director's performance is executed. Therefore, when a director's performance is executed in a special chart change performance that is about to start, in other words, when the special chart change pattern is an SPSP reach change, or when a specific performance type is determined in the specific performance determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a first premonition performance execution timing judgment to determine the timing of the premonition execution.

The first premonition execution timing determination is performed by referring to a first premonition execution timing determination table. An example of the configuration of the first premonition execution timing determination table is shown in FIG. 58. As shown in FIG. 58, the first premonition execution timing determination table is associated with the type of director's performance (director's performance type) executed in the special chart change performance.

Figure 58 (A) is an example of the configuration of the first premonition execution timing judgment table when the director's performance is executed twice in the special chart change performance. The first premonition execution timing judgment table in this case includes a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the first specific performance and the second specific performance, a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the first specific performance and the third specific performance (L), a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the first specific performance and the third specific performance (SP), a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the first specific performance and the SPSP reach (L), a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the first specific performance and the SPSP reach (SP). There are provided a timing determination table, a first premonition execution timing determination table for the second specific performance and the third specific performance (L), a first premonition execution timing determination table for the second specific performance and the third specific performance (SP), a first premonition execution timing determination table for the second specific performance and the SPSP reach (L), a first premonition execution timing determination table for the second specific performance and the SPSP reach (SP), a first premonition execution timing determination table for the third specific performance (L) and the SPSP reach (L), and a first premonition execution timing determination table for the third specific performance (SP) and the SPSP reach (SP).

Figure 58 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the first premonition execution timing judgment table when the director's performance is executed once in the special chart change performance. In this case, the first premonition execution timing judgment table includes a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the first specific performance, a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the second specific performance, a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the third specific performance (L), a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the third specific performance (SP), a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the SPSP reach (L), and a first premonition execution timing judgment table for the SPSP reach (SP).

The first premonition execution timing determination tables shown in Figures 58(A) and 58(B) are appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each premonition execution timing is the predetermined selection rate shown in Figures 58(A) and 58(B). As mentioned above, the execution timing at which the premonition performance can start is set according to the director performance type executed in the special chart variation performance.

In addition, when the special chart change pattern indicated by the received special chart change start command is an L reach change or an SP reach change, and the result of the specific performance judgment is "do not execute a specific performance," the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a premonition performance judgment to determine whether or not to execute a premonition performance.

The premonition effect judgment is performed by referring to the premonition effect judgment table. An example of the configuration of the premonition effect judgment table is shown in FIG. 59. As shown in FIG. 59, the premonition effect judgment table is associated with the special chart change pattern. Specifically, the premonition effect judgment tables include a premonition effect judgment table for SP big win changes, a premonition effect judgment table for L big win changes, a premonition effect judgment table for SP miss changes, and a premonition effect judgment table for L miss changes. Each premonition effect judgment table shown in FIG. 59 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for executing/not executing a premonition effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 59.

As shown in FIG. 59, "execute" may be selected in both the case of a jackpot variation and a miss variation. Therefore, if a premonition effect is executed but a specific effect is not executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot game state will be entered. In detail, for the SP jackpot variation and the SP miss variation, which are paired with the special chart variation effect flow, the selection rate for "execute premonition effect" is much higher in the case of the SP jackpot variation than in the case of the SP miss variation. Similarly, for the L jackpot variation and the L miss variation, which are paired with the special chart variation effect flow, the selection rate for "execute premonition effect" is much higher in the case of the L jackpot variation than in the case of the L miss variation. Therefore, it can be said that there is a very high possibility that a jackpot game state will be entered if a premonition effect is executed but a specific effect is not executed.

When the premonition performance determination determines that "premonition performance is to be executed," the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a second premonition execution timing determination to determine the timing of the premonition execution.

The second premonition execution timing judgment is performed by referring to the second premonition execution timing judgment table. An example of the configuration of the second premonition execution timing judgment table is shown in FIG. 60. As shown in FIG. 60, the second premonition execution timing judgment table is associated with the special chart fluctuation pattern. Specifically, as the second premonition execution timing judgment table, a second premonition execution timing judgment table for SP big win fluctuation, a second premonition execution timing judgment table for L big win fluctuation, a second premonition execution timing judgment table for SP miss fluctuation, and a second premonition execution timing judgment table for L miss fluctuation are provided. Each second premonition execution timing judgment table shown in FIG. 60 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each premonition performance execution timing becomes the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 60.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 performs the first premonition execution timing determination and the second premonition execution timing determination, it sets a command (premonition performance start command) indicating the premonition execution timing, which is the result of the determination, in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

The premonition performance start command set in the output buffer is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004). When the image control board 140's image CPU 141 receives the premonition performance start command, it starts the premonition performance by displaying the premonition performance image G50 on the display unit 50a when the premonition execution timing indicated by the premonition performance start command arrives.

In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines a specific performance type in the specific performance type determination, it sets a command (specific performance start command) indicating the specific performance type that is the result of the determination in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

The specific performance start command set in the output buffer is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004). When the image control board 140 receives the specific performance start command, when it is time to execute the specific performance (supervised execution timing) related to the specific performance type indicated by the specific performance start command, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts various specific performances, in other words, supervisory performances, by displaying images corresponding to the specific performance type (first specific performance image G51, second specific performance image G52, third specific performance image G53) on the display unit 50a.

As described above, the special chart variation performance start command set in the output buffer is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004). Therefore, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the special chart variation performance start command related to the SPSP reach, when the L reach SPSP development point or the SP reach SPSP development point is reached, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the SPSP reach, in other words, the director performance, by displaying the SPSP reach background image G116 on the display unit 50a.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, a director's performance (specific performance) that suggests that a jackpot game state (advantageous game state) may be entered may be executed, and before executing the director's performance (specific performance), a premonition performance that suggests that the director's performance (specific performance) will be executed may be executed. If the director's performance (specific performance) is not executed after the premonition performance is executed, the possibility of entering a jackpot game state (advantageous game state) is higher than the possibility of not entering a jackpot game state (advantageous game state). This allows the player to expect the director's performance when the premonition performance is executed, while maintaining the expectation of the jackpot game state even when the director's performance is not executed, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, the director's performance includes a specific performance (first specific performance) and an SPSP reach (second specific performance) that have different performance modes, so that the player can be excited about which type of specific performance will be executed when the premonition performance is executed, thereby further improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, the premonition effect may suggest that a specific effect (first specific effect) will be executed, or that an SPSP reach (second specific effect) will be executed. In either case, the premonition effect is executed in a substantially identical manner, making it difficult to tell which type of specific effect will be executed, further exciting the player and increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Modification of the first embodiment)
Next, modified examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. Note that the modified examples described below can be appropriately combined with each other.

In the first embodiment, the director's effects and premonition effects are executed in the normal game state and normal presentation mode, but the game state and presentation mode in which the director's effects can be executed are not limited to the first embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, the director's effects and premonition effects may be executable in multiple types of game states and presentation modes. Furthermore, the director's effects and premonition effects may be executable when a special chart 2 change is being performed.

The specific content and execution (start) timing of the director's direction and premonition direction are not particularly limited, and may be changed as appropriate. Also, the first specific direction and second specific direction that make up the director's direction have only one execution timing, but they may be made executable at multiple timings.

In addition, in the first embodiment, there are four types of directorial direction, but there may be one, two, or five or more types.

The maximum number of times that the director's direction can be performed in one special chart change direction is two, but this limit can also be one, three, or four.

Whether the director effect is executed once or twice in one special chart change performance, the same premonition performance content is executed, but the performance mode of the premonition performance when executed once may be different from the performance mode of the premonition performance when executed twice. Alternatively, multiple performance modes of the premonition performance may be set, and the expectation of the number of times the director effect is executed may differ depending on the performance mode of the premonition performance. For example, the performance mode of the premonition performance may include a first performance mode and a second performance mode, and the expectation of the director effect being executed twice may be higher in the second performance mode than in the first performance mode. In this case, the performance mode includes the specific display content of the premonition performance image G50, the display position of the premonition performance image G50, and the display time of the premonition performance image G50.

In addition, in both cases where the director's performance is executed once or twice in one special chart change performance, the premonition performance may be executed at the premonition execution timing corresponding to the director's performance type to be executed. For example, in one special chart change performance, if the second specific performance and the third specific performance (SP) are executed, the premonition performance will be executed twice, at timing B and timing D. In addition, in one special chart change performance, if the first specific performance and the SPSP reach (L) are executed, the premonition performance will be executed twice, at timing A and timing E. In addition, in the modified example, if the premonition performance is executed but the director's performance is not executed, the premonition performance may be executed at any premonition execution timing. In this case, it may be possible for the premonition performance to be executed but the director's performance not to be executed two or more times in one special chart change performance. In this case, the expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game state may be increased as the number of times the premonition performance is executed but the director's performance is not executed increases.

The director's effect is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state, but the target of the suggestion is not limited to the jackpot gaming state and may be changed as appropriate. For example, there is a jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds of play is relatively high (so-called "ball output performance" is relatively high) and a jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds of play is relatively low (so-called "ball output performance" is relatively low), and all or part of the director's effect may be an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state in which the number of rounds of play is relatively high (so-called "ball output performance" is relatively high). In addition, there are jackpot game states that involve game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability, high base game state) and jackpot game states that involve game states that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (e.g., a low probability, high base game state), and all or part of the director's presentation may be a presentation that suggests the possibility of transitioning to a jackpot game state that involves a game state that is relatively advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability, high base game state).

Furthermore, the execution of two supervisory effects in one special chart change effect, and the execution of a premonition effect in one special chart change effect but no supervisory effect are indicative of an extremely high probability of entering a jackpot gaming state, but either or both of these may suggest, in addition to or instead of an extremely high probability of entering a jackpot gaming state, an extremely high probability of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state in which a relatively large number of rounds are played (so-called "ball output performance" is relatively high), and/or an extremely high probability of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state involving a gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a high probability high base gaming state).

In the first embodiment, the director's performance is executed in the special chart variation performance, but it may be configured to be executable in the jackpot game. In this case, for example, the director's performance may be executed in a specified round of play, and there are cases where the jackpot game ends in the specified round of play and cases where the jackpot game continues to be played, and the execution of the director's performance may increase the chances of the jackpot game continuing to be played. Alternatively, the director's performance may be executed in a specified round of play, and there are cases where the game transitions to a first game state upon the end of the jackpot game and cases where the game transitions to a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state upon the end of the jackpot game, and the execution of the line preview may increase the chances of the game transitioning to the second game state upon the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the director's effects and premonition effects can be executed as look-ahead effects based on the results of the look-ahead judgment, and can be executed over multiple special chart change effects before the start of the special chart change effect corresponding to the special chart 1 reservation related to the look-ahead judgment.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the second embodiment will be mainly described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as the basic embodiment or the similar corresponding configurations.

The pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment displays a decorative image G60 in the reserved display area 50d of the display unit 50a and near the display area 50e in the normal presentation mode. As described in the basic embodiment, the display unit 50a is formed with the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 (reserved display area 50d) that displays reserved icons of reserved order 1 to reserved order 4, and the display area 50e that displays the icons, but the pachinko gaming machine PY2 displays a decorative image G60 directly below the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 (reserved display area 50d) and the display area 50e in the normal presentation mode.

Figure 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the decorative image G60 displayed on the display unit 50a. Figure 61 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the entire display unit 50a, and Figure 61 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e in detail. As shown in Figures 61 (A) and 61 (B), the decorative image G60 is generally formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and in the normal performance mode, it is usually displayed at the bottom end of the display unit 50a. However, as described later, the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e may move together.

The decorative image G60 is basically displayed superimposed on the normal background images G111-113 except when the customer waiting demo video G100, the L reach background image G114, and the SP reach background image G115 are displayed. In other words, when a demo performance is executed (the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed) without a special chart variable display or a big win game being played, or when an L reach or an SP reach is not executed (the L reach background image G114 or the SP reach background image G115 is displayed) during a special chart variable display, and normal miss fluctuations or N reach fluctuations are repeatedly executed, the decorative image G60 continues to be displayed seamlessly across multiple special chart variable displays. Therefore, when a special chart stop display in a mode indicating a miss is performed in a certain special chart variable display and then the next special chart variable display is started, the decorative image G60 continues to be displayed seamlessly without changing even when the special chart variable display is switched.

The decorative image G60 is displayed adjacent to the lower side of the hold display area 50d and includes a hold icon placement image G60a on which the hold icon is placed, an icon placement image G60b on which the hold icon is placed, and a base image G60c that is like a base and integrally supports the hold icon placement image G60a and the icon placement image G60b.

The hold icon placement image G60a further includes a first hold icon placement image G60a1 on which the hold icon (corresponding to hold order 1) displayed in the first region 50d1 is placed, a second hold icon placement image G60a2 on which the hold icon (corresponding to hold order 2) displayed in the second region 50d2 is placed, a third hold icon placement image G60a3 on which the hold icon (corresponding to hold order 3) displayed in the third region 50d3 is placed, and a fourth hold icon placement image G60a4 on which the hold icon (corresponding to hold order 4) displayed in the fourth region 50d4 is placed. The first hold icon placement image G60a1, the second hold icon placement image G60a2, the third hold icon placement image G60a3, the fourth hold icon placement image G60a4, and the icon placement image G60b all represent pedestals of low height.

Next, the movement of the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e in an integrated manner will be described. In the second embodiment, the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e do not move independently, but when they move, the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e always move in an integrated manner. Therefore, in the following, the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e are basically regarded as being integrated, and the integrated decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e are collectively referred to as "decorative image G60". Therefore, for example, "movement of decorative image G60/decorative image G60 moves" means "the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e move together/the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e move together."

Movement modes of the decorative image G60 include a first movement mode and a second movement mode. In the first movement mode, the decorative image G60 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise as a whole when viewed from the front, and moved to the left end of the display unit 50a. On the other hand, in the second movement mode, the decorative image G60 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as a whole when viewed from the front, and moved to the right end of the display unit 50a. Note that the mode of the decorative image G60 in which the decorative image G60 has not moved, as shown in Figures 61(A) and 61(B), is referred to as the "normal mode", and the decorative image G60 in the normal mode is positioned as the standard for the decorative image G60.

62(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the first moving state, and FIG. 62(B) is an explanatory diagram showing in detail the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the first moving state. As shown in FIG. 62(A) and FIG. 62(B), when the decorative image G60 is in the first moving state, the display area 50e is relatively arranged at the top, and from there, the first area 50d1, the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order downward. In the second embodiment, the normal state decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e differ from the first moving state decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in terms of posture and display position, but other elements such as the size of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, the spacing between the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4, and the spacing between the reserved display area 50d and the display area 50e are not changed. In addition, the size of the reserved icon and the icon is not changed between the normal state decorative image G60 and the first moving state decorative image G60.

63(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the second movement mode, and FIG. 63(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in detail in the second movement mode. As shown in FIG. 63(A) and FIG. 63(B), when the decorative image G60 is in the second movement mode, the display area 50e is relatively arranged at the bottom end, and from there, the first area 50d1, the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order upward. In the second embodiment, the normal state decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e differ from the second moving state decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in terms of posture and display position, but other elements such as the size of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, the spacing between the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4, and the spacing between the reserved display area 50d and the display area 50e are not changed. In addition, the size of the reserved icon and the icon is not changed between the normal state decorative image G60 and the second moving state decorative image G60.

In the following, the display position of the decorative image G60 in the normal state shown in FIG. 61(A), the pending display area 50d, and the entire display area 50e on the display unit 50a is referred to as the "normal position". Similarly, the display position of the decorative image G60 in the first moving state shown in FIG. 62(A), the pending display area 50d, and the entire display area 50e on the display unit 50a is referred to as the "first special position", and the display position of the decorative image G60 in the second moving state shown in FIG. 63(A), the pending display area 50d, and the entire display area 50e on the display unit 50a is referred to as the "second special position". The "first special position" and the "second special position" may be collectively referred to as the "special position".

In addition, when the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e are moved to the first special position, the hold icon and the icon in question are also displayed in the first special position. Similarly, when the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e are moved to the second special position, the hold icon and the icon in question are also displayed in the second special position. Therefore, the movement of the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e can also be considered as the movement of the hold icon and the icon in question.

Although not shown, the movement process when the decorative image G60 moves from the normal position to the first special position can be set appropriately, but for example, the decorative image G60 rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the situation shown in FIG. 61(A) around the right end, assumes a generally vertically standing posture near the right end of the display unit 50a, moves leftward while maintaining that posture, and stops near the left end of the display unit 50a, entering the first movement mode shown in FIG. 62(A). In addition, when the decorative image G60 returns to the normal position from the first special position, it returns by the movement process reverse to that when it moved from the normal position to the first special position.

Furthermore, although not shown, the movement process when the decorative image G60 moves from the normal position to the second special position can be set appropriately, but for example, the decorative image G60 rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the situation shown in FIG. 61(A) around the left end, assumes a generally vertically standing posture near the left end of the display unit 50a, moves to the right while maintaining that posture, and stops near the right end of the display unit 50a, entering the second movement mode shown in FIG. 63(A). Also, when the decorative image G60 returns to the normal position from the second special position, it returns by the movement process reverse to that when it moved from the normal position to the second special position.

The movement of the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e from the normal position to the first special position and the second special position is performed in the same way whether the icon or pending icon is displayed or not. Furthermore, when the icon or pending icon is displayed in the pending display area 50d and the display area 50e in the normal position and is moved to the first special position or the second special position, the positional relationship between the icon or pending icon and the decorative image G60 is maintained. In other words, when the decorative image G60 moves from the normal position to the first special position or the second special position, the icon or pending icon displayed there is also rotated or moved integrally with the decorative image G60.

The movement of the decorative image G60 from the normal position to the first special position, and the movement of the decorative image G60 from the normal position to the second special position constitute an effect suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game state being reached, in other words, an effect that, when executed, increases the expectation (chance increase) of a transition to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the movement of the decorative image G60 from the normal position to the first special position is sometimes referred to as the "first reserve position movement notice," and the movement of the decorative image G60 from the normal position to the second special position is sometimes referred to as the "second reserve position movement notice." In the second embodiment, the possibility of a jackpot game state being reached is higher when the second reserve position movement notice is executed than when the first reserve position movement notice is executed.

Note that the "first hold position movement notice" and the "second hold position movement notice" may be collectively referred to as the "hold position movement notice." In addition, in the second embodiment, the first hold position movement notice and the second hold position movement notice are not executed together in one performance opportunity. That is, the first hold position movement notice and the second hold position movement notice are not executed consecutively, and the second hold position movement notice and the first hold position movement notice are not executed consecutively. In other words, the decorative image G60 that has moved from the normal position to the first special position does not move further to the second special position. Similarly, the decorative image G60 that has moved from the normal position to the second special position does not move further to the first special position. Therefore, when the first hold position movement notice ends, the decorative image G60 returns to the normal position. Similarly, when the second hold position movement notice ends, the decorative image G60 returns to the normal position.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as described below, the hold position movement notice is executed as a look-ahead performance based on the look-ahead judgment result. The hold position movement notice starts when one second has passed since the hold icon corresponding to the special chart 1 hold related to the look-ahead judgment is displayed. In other words, when one second has passed since the hold icon corresponding to the special chart 1 hold related to the hold position movement notice is displayed, the decorative image G60 moves from the normal position to the special position.

More specifically, when the result of the look-ahead judgment is "SP jackpot variation", "L jackpot variation", "SP miss variation", "L miss variation", or "N miss variation", the reserved position movement notice can be executed. In other words, when the reserved position movement notice is executed, a reach is always established with the special chart 1 change display corresponding to the look-ahead judgment related to the reserved position movement notice. The reserved position movement notice ends when the reach is established, and the decorative image G60 returns to the normal position from the special position after the reach is established and before the N reach begins.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY2, when a special chart 1 reservation occurs, the reservation icon appears in a normal state. Then, when the decorative image G60 is displayed in the normal position, when the decorative image G60 is displayed in the first special position (the first reservation position movement notice is executed), and when the decorative image G60 is displayed in the second special position (the second reservation position movement notice is executed), a reservation change notice may be executed in which the reservation icon in the normal state changes to a special state. In the second embodiment, the reservation change notice is likely to be executed in the following order: when the decorative image G60 is displayed in the normal position (when the reservation position movement notice is not executed) < when the decorative image G60 is displayed in the first special position (when the first reservation position movement notice is executed) < when the decorative image G60 is displayed in the second special position (when the second reservation position movement notice is executed).

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY2, three types of special modes are set as special modes: a first special mode, a second special mode, and a third special mode. In the second embodiment, the normal mode is a white circle, the first special mode is a green circle, the second special mode is a red circle, and the third special mode three modes are gold circles. The probability of entering the jackpot game state suggested by the special mode type is high in the order of the first special mode < the second special mode < the third special mode.

Next, an example of the control content related to the hold position movement notice and the hold change notice will be described. Note that the control content described below is an example of the control content related to the hold position movement notice and the hold change notice, so the control content is not limited to the content below and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the first start winning command, it proceeds to step S4302. In step S4302, it first indicates the reservation order for the special chart 1 reservation corresponding to the first start winning command, and sets in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 a command (reserved performance command) indicating that the reserved icon corresponding to the occurrence of the special chart 1 reservation, in other words, the determination of a jackpot, or the acquisition of the right to execute the special chart 1 variable display, is to be displayed.

Next, when the special chart change is currently being displayed, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a reserve position movement notice judgment based on the received first start winning command to determine whether or not to execute the reserve position movement notice, and if so, the type of reserve position movement notice (reserve position movement notice type: first reserve position movement notice, second reserve position movement notice). Note that when the special chart change is not being displayed, the performance control microcomputer 121 does not perform a reserve position movement notice judgment, but performs a reserve change notice judgment, which will be described later. Therefore, in the second embodiment, a reserve position movement notice is not performed for a special chart 1 reserve that occurs when the special chart change display is not being performed.

The reserve position movement notice judgment is performed by referring to the reserve position movement notice judgment table. An example of the reserve position movement notice judgment table is shown in FIG. 64. As shown in FIG. 64, the reserve position movement notice judgment table is associated with the special chart change pattern which is the result of the pre-read judgment indicated by the first start winning command. Specifically, the reserve position movement notice judgment tables include a reserve position movement notice judgment table for SP big win changes, a reserve position movement notice judgment table for L big win changes, a reserve position movement notice judgment table for SP miss changes, a reserve position movement notice judgment table for L miss changes, a reserve position movement notice judgment table for N miss changes, and a reserve position movement notice judgment table for normal miss changes.

In each hold position movement notice judgment table, the judgment results are set as "first hold position movement notice," "second hold position movement notice," and "do not execute." The judgment result "first hold position movement notice" corresponds to executing the first hold position movement notice, the judgment result "second hold position movement notice" corresponds to executing the second hold position movement notice, and the judgment result "do not execute" corresponds to not executing the hold position movement notice. Each hold position movement notice judgment table shown in FIG. 64 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each judgment result (first hold position movement notice, second hold position movement notice, do not execute) is the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 64.

As shown in FIG. 64, the "first hold position movement notice" and the "second hold position movement notice" may be selected in both the case of a jackpot fluctuation and a miss fluctuation. Therefore, when the first hold position movement notice or the second hold position movement notice is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot gaming state will be reached. In other words, the first hold position movement notice and the second hold position movement notice are effects that suggest that there is a possibility that a jackpot gaming state will be reached.

In addition, for SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, the selection rate of the second reserved position movement notice is higher than the selection rate of the first reserved position movement notice, and for SP miss fluctuations and L miss fluctuations, the selection rate of the first reserved position movement notice is higher than the selection rate of the second reserved position movement notice. Therefore, in general, there is a higher possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state based on the special chart variable display corresponding to the first start winning command when the second reserved position movement notice is executed than when the first reserved position movement notice is executed.

When the result of the hold position movement notice judgment is "first hold position movement notice" or "second hold position movement notice," the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a command (hold position movement notice command) indicating the judgment result (hold position movement notice type) in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In the following, when the "first hold position movement notice" or "second hold position movement notice" is selected in the hold position movement notice judgment, the special chart 1 hold that is the subject of that judgment is referred to as the "hold position movement notice target hold." In other words, the hold position movement notice target hold is the subject of the hold position movement notice, and the hold position movement notice is positioned as a performance toward a jackpot judgment related to the hold position movement notice target hold and a special chart 1 change display.

After completing the hold position movement notice judgment, the performance control microcontroller 121 next performs a hold change notice judgment to determine whether or not to execute the hold change notice, and if so, the type of special mode (first special mode, second special mode, third special mode). The hold change notice judgment is performed by referring to the hold change notice judgment table. An example of the configuration of the hold change notice judgment table is shown in Figures 65-1 to 65-3.

As shown in Figures 65-1 to 65-3, the reserve change notice judgment table is associated with the special chart change pattern, which is the result of the pre-read judgment indicated by the start winning command, and the judgment result of the reserve position movement notice judgment (first reserve position movement notice, second reserve position movement notice, not executed). Specifically, the reserve change notice judgment table includes a reserve change notice judgment table for SP big win fluctuation, a reserve change notice judgment table for L big win fluctuation, a reserve change notice judgment table for SP miss fluctuation, a reserve change notice judgment table for L miss fluctuation, a reserve change notice judgment table for N miss fluctuation, and a reserve change notice judgment table for normal miss fluctuation. Furthermore, among the reserve change notice judgment tables associated with the special chart change pattern, there is one associated with the reserve position movement notice judgment result "first reserve position movement notice", one associated with the reserve position movement notice judgment result "second reserve position movement notice", and one associated with the reserve position movement notice judgment result "not executed".

In each reserved change notice judgment table, the judgment results are set as "normal mode," "first special mode," "second special mode," and "third special mode." The judgment result "normal mode" corresponds to the final display mode of the icon that is the subject of the judgment being the normal mode and not executing a reserved change notice, the judgment result "first special mode" corresponds to the final display mode of the icon that is the subject of the judgment being the first special mode and executing a reserved change notice that changes the reserved icon from the normal mode to the first special mode, the judgment result "second special mode" corresponds to the final display mode of the icon that is the subject of the judgment being the second special mode and executing a reserved change notice that changes the reserved icon from the normal mode to the second special mode, and the judgment result "third special mode" corresponds to the final display mode of the icon that is the subject of the judgment being the third special mode and executing a reserved change notice that changes the reserved icon from the normal mode to the third special mode. Each of the hold change notice judgment tables shown in Figures 65-1 to 65-3 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each judgment result (normal mode, first special mode, second special mode, third special mode) is the predetermined selection rate shown in Figures 65-1 to 65-3.

As shown in Figures 65-1 to 65-3, for SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, SP miss fluctuation, and L miss fluctuation, the selection rate for the entire special mode is high when the hold position movement notice judgment result is "Do not execute" < "First hold position movement notice" < "Second hold position movement notice." Also, for N reach fluctuation, "Second hold position movement notice" is never selected, but the selection rate for the entire special mode is high when the hold position movement notice judgment result is "Do not execute" < "First hold position movement notice." Therefore, in general, the possibility (expectation) of the hold change notice being executed is high in the order of when the hold position movement notice is not executed < when the first hold position movement notice is executed < when the second hold position movement notice is executed.

Furthermore, for SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, the selection rate for the second special mode and the third special mode is high in the order of the reserved position movement notice judgment result "Do not execute" < "First reserved position movement notice" < "Second reserved position movement notice". Also, for SP miss fluctuations, the "third special mode" is never selected in the case of "Do not execute" and "First reserved position movement notice", but the "third special mode" may be selected in the case of "Second reserved position movement notice", and the selection rate for the second special mode is high in the order of "Do not execute" < "First reserved position movement notice" < "Second reserved position movement notice". Also, for L miss fluctuations, the "third special mode" is never selected, but the selection rate for the second special mode is high in the order of "Do not execute" < "First reserved position movement notice" < "Second reserved position movement notice". Also, for N miss fluctuations, the second special mode and the third special mode are never selected. Therefore, generally speaking, it is highly likely that a hold change notification suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility of transitioning to a jackpot game state will be executed (the hold icon will change to a display mode suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility of transitioning to a jackpot game state) in the following order: when the hold position movement notification is not executed < when the first hold position movement notification is executed < when the second hold position movement notification is executed.

Note that not executing the reserved position movement notice means that the decorative image G60, the reserved icon, or the icon in question are displayed in the normal position, executing the first reserved position movement notice means that the decorative image G60, the reserved icon, or the icon in question are displayed in the first special position, and executing the second reserved position movement notice means that the decorative image G60, the reserved icon, or the icon in question are displayed in the second special position. Therefore, it is highly likely that the reserved change notice will be executed when the display positions of the decorative image G60, the reserved icon, or the icon in question are in the order of normal position < first special position < second special position. It is also highly likely that the reserved change notice will be executed (the reserved icon will change to a display mode suggesting that it is relatively more likely to transition to a jackpot game state) when the display positions of the decorative image G60, the reserved icon, or the icon in question are in the order of normal position < first special position < second special position.

In addition, in step S4302, when the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines that the special chart change is not currently being displayed, it performs a hold change notice judgment without performing a hold position movement notice judgment. In this case, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a hold change notice in the same way as when the judgment result in the hold position movement notice judgment is "not to be executed."

When the result of the hold change notice judgment is the "first special mode," "second special mode," or "third special mode," in other words, when it judges that the hold change notice should be executed in the hold change notice, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a command (hold change notice command) indicating the judgment result (special mode type) in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the hold change notice command in the output buffer in association with the hold performance command related to the hold icon corresponding to the special chart 1 hold that is the subject of the hold change notice judgment.

In the following, when the "First Special Mode," "Second Special Mode," or "Third Special Mode" is selected in the reserve change notice judgment, the special chart 1 reserve that is the subject of that judgment is referred to as the "reserve subject to reserve change notice." In other words, the reserve subject to reserve change notice is the subject of the reserve change notice, and the reserve change notice is positioned as a performance toward a jackpot judgment related to the reserve subject to reserve change notice and a special chart 1 change display.

In addition, if the result of the hold change notice judgment is the "first special mode," "second special mode," or "third special mode," the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a hold change timing judgment to determine the timing for executing the hold change notice (hold change timing). The hold change timing judgment is performed by referring to a hold change timing judgment table. An example of the configuration of the hold change timing judgment table is shown in Figure 66.

As shown in FIG. 66, the hold change timing judgment table is associated with the hold order when a hold subject to hold change notice occurs. Specifically, the hold change timing judgment tables include a hold change timing judgment table for hold order 4, a hold change timing judgment table for hold order 3, a hold change timing judgment table for hold order 2, and a hold change timing judgment table for hold order 1.

In each reserved change timing judgment table, "reserved order 3", "reserved order 2", "reserved order 1", and "relevant change" are set as judgment results. "Reserved order 3" as a judgment result represents the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the icon related to the reserved change notice target reserved (reserved change notice target icon) shifted (moved) to the third area 50d3, "reserved order 2" represents the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the reserved change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the second area 50d2, "reserved order 1" represents the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the reserved change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the first area 50d1, and "relevant change" represents the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the reserved change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the display area 50de. Each reserved change timing judgment table shown in FIG. 66 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each judgment result (reserved order 3, reserved order 2, reserved order 1, relevant change) is the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 66.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 has completed the hold change timing determination, it sets a command (hold change timing command) indicating the determination result (hold change timing) in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the hold change timing command in the output buffer in association with the hold change notice command related to the hold change notice that is the subject of the hold change timing determination.

The hold performance command, hold position movement notice command, hold change notice command, and hold change timing command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 are sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004). Note that the hold performance command, hold position movement notice command, hold change notice command, and hold change timing command are set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 in the same step S4302 by the above-mentioned series of processes, and are basically sent together to the image control board 140, but strictly speaking, the performance control microcomputer 121 first sends the hold performance command, then the hold position movement notice command, and then the hold change notice command and the hold change timing command in that order.

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a hold display command, it immediately displays a hold icon in the normal mode in a position (first area 50d1, second area 50d2, third area 50d3, fourth area 50d4) in the hold display area 50d according to the hold order for the special chart 1 hold indicated by the hold display command.

In addition, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a hold position movement notification command, it executes the hold position movement notification of the type indicated by the hold position movement notification command when one second has elapsed since displaying the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the subject of the hold position movement notification.

Furthermore, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a hold change notice command, it changes the hold icon in the normal state related to the hold presentation command associated with the hold change notice command to the special state indicated by the hold change notice command at the timing indicated by the hold change timing command associated with the hold change notice command.

Next, we will explain specific examples of hold position movement notices and hold change notices. Figures 67 to 69 are explanatory diagrams that explain specific examples of hold position movement notices and hold change notices.

In addition, to explain specific examples of the hold position movement notice and hold change notice, it is assumed that the current situation is normal presentation mode as shown in FIG. 67(A), with the changing display of the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3 being superimposed on the first normal background image G111, and the normal mode icon HA0 corresponding to the changing display of the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and the normal mode hold icon HA1 corresponding to the special pattern 1 hold in hold order 1 are being displayed.

In addition, in the situation shown in FIG. 67(A), it is assumed that there are no plans to execute a hold position movement notice or a hold change notice. It is also assumed that the special chart change pattern for the icon HA0 is a no-reach miss, and the special chart change pattern for the hold icon HA1 is a no-reach miss.

For example, let us assume that a special pattern 1 reservation in reservation order 2 occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 67(A), the result of the pre-read judgment regarding the special pattern 1 reservation is a SP jackpot change, the reservation position movement notice judgment based on the occurrence of the special pattern 1 reservation judges it as a "second reservation position movement notice," the reservation change notice judgment judges it as a "second special mode," and the reservation change timing judgment judges it as "reservation order 1." In other words, the special pattern 1 reservation becomes a reservation subject to reservation position movement notice. Then, first, in response to the occurrence of the special pattern 1 reservation in reservation order 2, the reservation icon HA2 in the normal mode is displayed in a position corresponding to reservation order 2, as shown in FIG. 67(B).

Then, when two seconds have passed since the hold icon HA2 corresponding to the hold that is the subject of the hold position movement notice is displayed, the second hold position movement notice is executed by moving the decorative image G60 to the second special position as shown in FIG. 67(C). Then, when the special chart 1 variable display that was performed in the situation shown in FIG. 67(A) ends and the special chart 1 is displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a no-reach miss as shown in FIG. 67(D), the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that had been displayed as variables until then are displayed as stopped in a manner indicating a no-reach miss, and the icon HA0 is erased.

Next, when the special chart 1 change display corresponding to the special chart 1 hold in hold order 1 starts, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the change display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the hold icon HA1 moves to the display area 50e (not shown) and becomes the hold icon HA1, and the hold icon HA2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown) and becomes the hold icon HA2 representing hold order 1.

Here, the result of the hold change timing judgment based on the special chart 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon HA2 was "hold order 1", so when 2 seconds have passed since the hold order of the special chart 1 hold became hold order 1, as shown in Figure 68 (B), the display mode of the hold icon HA2 changes from the normal mode to the second special mode. Then, when the special chart 1 variable display performed in the situation shown in Figure 68 (A) ends and the special chart 1 is displayed stopped in a mode indicating a miss as shown in Figure 68 (C), the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that had been displayed variable up until then are displayed stopped in a mode indicating a miss with no reach, and the icon HA1 is erased.

Next, when the special chart 1 change display corresponding to the special chart 1 hold in hold order 1 starts, as shown in Figure 68 (D), the change display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the hold icon HA2 moves to the display area 50e (not shown) and becomes the icon HA2.

After that, the result of the pre-read judgment of the special chart 1 reserved corresponding to the reserved icon HA2 was "SP jackpot change", so for example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), normal change occurs, and when a reach is achieved, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the first reserved position movement notice ends. Specifically, the decorative image G60 returns to the normal position between the achievement of the reach and the start of the N reach, as shown in FIG. 69(C).

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY2, the display unit 50a displays the reserved icon or the icon (specific image) at the first special position (first display position) and at the second special position (second display position), and the reserved icon or the icon (specific image) is more likely to be in a jackpot game state (advantageous game state) when it is displayed at the second special position (second display position) than when it is displayed at the first special position (first display position), which gives the player a surprise and makes him/her pay attention to the display position of the reserved icon or the icon, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, the display position of the reserved icon or the icon (specific image) is the normal position (normal display position), and when the reserved icon or the icon (specific image) is displayed at the normal position (normal display position), there are times when it moves to the first special position (first display position) and times when it moves to the second special position (second display position), which prevents the monotony of the performance using the reserved icon or the icon (specific image), thereby further improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the object displayed in the first special position (first display position) or the second special position (second display position) is an icon (reserved icon, the icon in question) that may be displayed in the normal position (normal display position) in response to the occurrence of special chart 1 reservation (jackpot determination, the right to execute special chart variable display), the period during which interest in the game is increased can be sustained.

(Modification of the second embodiment)
Next, modified examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. Note that the modified examples described below can be appropriately combined with each other.

In the second embodiment, the hold position movement notice and the hold change notice are executed in the normal game state and normal presentation mode, but the game state and presentation mode in which the hold position movement notice and the hold change notice can be executed are not limited to the second embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, the hold position movement notice and the hold change notice may be executable in a plurality of game states and presentation modes. Furthermore, the hold position movement notice and the hold change notice may be executable based on the results of a look-ahead judgment regarding the special chart 2 hold.

There are two types of hold position movement notice types, in other words, special display positions of decorative image G60, or further in other words, special display positions of hold icons or icons, but the number of types is not particularly limited and may be one type or three or more types.

In addition, there are two types of presentation content for various hold position movement notices, in other words, the special display positions of the decorative image G60, or in other words, the special display positions of the hold icon or icon, but this presentation content is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, as a first hold position movement notice, decorative image G60 is displayed at the left end of display unit 50a rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state, but both or either of this angle and its display position on display unit 50a may be changed as appropriate. Similarly, as a second hold position movement notice, decorative image G60 is displayed at the right end of display unit 50a rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state, but both or either of this angle and its display position on display unit 50a may be changed as appropriate.

In both the first hold position movement notice and the second hold position movement notice, the decorative image G60, the hold display area 50d, and the display area 50e are the same size as in the normal mode, but for both or one of the first hold position movement notice and the second hold position movement notice, they may be enlarged or reduced compared to the normal mode. Alternatively, the decorative image G60, the hold display area 50d, and the display area 50e may be enlarged compared to the normal mode in either the first hold position movement notice or the second hold position movement notice, and reduced compared to the normal mode in the other. Note that when these enlargements and reductions are made, the size of the icon and the hold icon will naturally be enlarged or reduced accordingly.

For example, in the first hold position movement notice, the decorative image G60 is reduced to about 1/3 overall, but is maintained in the same horizontal direction as in the normal mode, and is, for example, positioned approximately in the vertical center of the area where the left performance pattern EZ1 of the display unit 50a is displayed, and in the second hold position movement notice, the decorative image G60 is reduced to about 1/3 overall, but is maintained in the same horizontal direction as in the normal mode, and is, for example, positioned approximately in the vertical center of the area where the right performance pattern EZ3 of the display unit 50a is displayed. Alternatively, in the first hold position movement notice, the decorative image G60 is reduced to about 2/3 overall, is maintained in a state rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise from the normal mode, and is positioned near the bottom of the area where the left performance pattern EZ1 of the display unit 50a is displayed, and in the second hold position movement notice, the decorative image G60 is reduced to about 4/5 overall, is maintained in a state rotated 20 degrees counterclockwise from the normal mode, and is positioned near the bottom of the area where the left performance pattern EZ1 of the display unit 50a is displayed.

In addition, when the first hold position movement notice or the second hold position movement notice is executed, the display positions of the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e move together, but in this case, the design of the decorative image G60 may be changed or the decorative image G60 may be erased.

The hold position movement notice is executed one second after the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the hold position movement notice is displayed, but this execution timing is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the hold position movement notice may be executed when the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the hold position movement notice is displayed, or after the hold order related to the hold that is the target of the hold position movement notice has advanced, in other words, after the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the hold position movement notice has moved toward the display area 50e. Furthermore, multiple timings at which the hold position movement notice can be executed may be set.

The hold position movement notice ends when a reach is achieved in the special chart change performance corresponding to the hold that is the target of the hold position movement notice, but the timing at which the hold position movement notice ends is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the hold position movement notice may end when the special chart change performance corresponding to the hold that is the target of the hold position movement notice starts, or the hold position movement notice may end before the special chart change performance corresponding to the hold that is the target of the hold position movement notice starts. Also, multiple timings for the hold position movement notice to end may be set.

There are three types of special mode types, but the number of types is not particularly limited and may be one, two, or four or more. In the second embodiment, the reserved icon always appears in a normal mode, but it may appear in a special mode. Furthermore, the reserved change notice is a change from a normal mode to a special mode, but it may be possible to execute a reserved change notice that changes from a special mode to a normal mode, and/or a reserved change notice that changes from any special mode to another special mode. In addition, it may be possible to execute a reserved change notice in which the display mode changes multiple times between the appearance and disappearance of one reserved icon. In this case, the expected value of the number of times that the display mode of the icon corresponding to the reserved object of the reserved position movement notice or the icon corresponding to another reserved special image 1 changes may be increased in the order of when the decorative image G60 is displayed in the normal position < when the decorative image G60 is displayed in the first special position (the first reserved position movement notice is executed) < when the decorative image G60 is displayed in the second special position (the second reserved position movement notice is executed).

In addition, in the second embodiment, the execution timing of the hold change notice is set to when 2 seconds have passed since the hold change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the third area 50d3, when 2 seconds have passed since the hold change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the second area 50d2, when 2 seconds have passed since the hold change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the first area 50d1, and when 2 seconds have passed since the hold change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the display area 50e, but the execution timing of the hold change notice can be set appropriately, and may be set appropriately in addition to or in place of all or some of these.

As a pre-reading performance based on the result of the pre-reading judgment regarding the special chart 1 reservation, a pre-reading position movement notice is executed in which the display position of the decorative image G60, in other words, the reservation icon or the icon in question, moves, but the target of the display position may be changed from the decorative image G60, in other words, the reservation icon or the icon in question, to another image. For example, as a pre-reading performance based on the result of the pre-reading judgment regarding the special chart 1 reservation, a performance in which the display position of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, small patterns KZ1 to KZ3, or another specific image moves may be executed. In this case, multiple performance types of the pre-reading performance may be set depending on the difference in the display position. Also, as with the above-mentioned modification example of the pre-reading position movement notice, when the pre-reading performance is executed, the size or posture of the target image may be changed.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the third embodiment will be mainly described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as the basic embodiment or the similar corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko game machine PY3 according to the third embodiment, in the normal game state and in the special chart variation presentation in the normal presentation mode, a special mode presentation that suggests that the player may be in a favorable game state, in other words, the execution of a special mode presentation that increases the player's chances of being in a favorable game state, may be executed in addition to the presentation flow configuration presentation such as reach and various reach presentations, during the normal game state and the special chart variation presentation. The special mode presentation can be executed during the normal variation of the special chart variation presentation.

Note that, although specific examples will be described later, in the special mode presentation, a background image dedicated to the special mode presentation (background image for special mode presentation) G117 is displayed across the entire display unit 50a. Although detailed explanations will be omitted, the background image for special mode presentation G117 is composed of 2D animation with a predetermined storyline. In addition, the special mode presentation is executed in the normal variation, which is a presentation flow configuration presentation.

Figure 70 is a diagram showing the presentation flow for the special mode presentation. As shown in Figure 70, in the special mode presentation, first, a special mode presentation opening notification presentation is executed to notify that the special mode presentation has started, followed by three unit presentations that are central to the special mode presentation, then a summary presentation that brings together the three unit presentations is executed, and finally, a special mode presentation end notification presentation is executed to notify that the special mode presentation has ended.

In each unit performance, first, a chance-up type suggestion performance is executed, which suggests the type of chance-up performance (chance-up type), and then the chance-up performance is executed. The chance-up performance is an performance that, when executed, increases the expectation of entering a jackpot game state (increases the chances).

The first chance up effect, the second chance up effect, and the third chance up effect are set as the chance up types. The first chance up effect is composed of an effect (cut-in effect) in which a cut-in is performed on the display unit 50a, the second chance up effect is composed of an effect (group crossing effect) in which a predetermined group crosses from left to right on the display unit 50a, and the third chance up effect is composed of an effect (frame lamp flash) in which the frame lamp 53 emits light in a specific manner. Therefore, the chance up type suggestion effect of the first chance up effect (first chance up type suggestion effect) is an effect that suggests that a cut-in effect will be executed, the chance up type suggestion effect of the second chance up effect (second chance up type suggestion effect) is an effect that suggests that a group crossing effect will be executed, and the chance up type suggestion effect of the third chance up effect (third chance up type suggestion effect) is an effect that suggests that a frame lamp flash will be executed.

In addition, three types of presentation modes (first chance up presentation modes) are set for the first chance up presentation: first presentation mode A, first presentation mode B, and first presentation mode C. Three types of presentation modes (second chance up presentation modes) are set for the second chance up presentation: second presentation mode A, second presentation mode B, and second presentation mode C. Similarly, three types of presentation modes (third chance up presentation modes) are set for the third chance up presentation: third presentation mode A, third presentation mode B, and third presentation mode C.

The first chance up presentation mode, the second chance up presentation mode, and the third chance up presentation mode are associated with the expectation of entering the jackpot gaming state suggested by that presentation mode. For the first chance up presentation mode, the expectation of entering the jackpot gaming state is high in the order of first presentation mode A < first presentation mode B < first presentation mode C. For the second chance up presentation mode, the expectation of entering the jackpot gaming state is high in the order of second presentation mode A < second presentation mode B < second presentation mode C. For the third chance up presentation mode, the expectation of entering the jackpot gaming state is high in the order of third presentation mode A < third presentation mode B < third presentation mode C.

The type of the first chance-up performance mode is associated with the color of the image (cut-in performance image) G61 used in the cut-in performance. The first performance mode A is associated with green, the first performance mode B is associated with red, and the first performance mode C is associated with gold. The type of the second chance-up performance mode is associated with the number of baseball balls constituting the image (group crossing performance image) G62 used in the group crossing performance. The second performance mode A is associated with 5 balls, the second performance mode B is associated with 15 balls, and the second performance mode C is associated with 30 balls. The type of the third chance-up performance mode is associated with the color of the frame lamp 53 that emits light in the frame lamp flash. The third performance mode A is associated with green, the third performance mode B is associated with red, and the third performance mode C is associated with rainbow.

Next, we will explain the promotion of chance up effects. As mentioned above, the number of times that chance up effects can be executed throughout the entire special mode effect is three. Furthermore, in any order of unit effects, there are times when the first chance up effect is executed, times when the second chance up effect is executed, and times when the third chance up effect is executed. Therefore, in the special mode performance, there are cases where the first chance up performance, the second chance up performance, and the third chance up performance are each executed once, cases where the first chance up performance is executed twice and the second chance up performance once, cases where the first chance up performance is executed twice and the third chance up performance once, cases where the second chance up performance is executed twice and the first chance up performance once, cases where the third chance up performance is executed twice and the first chance up performance once, cases where the third chance up performance is executed twice and the second chance up performance once, cases where the first chance up performance is executed three times, cases where the second chance up performance is executed three times, and cases where the third chance up performance is executed three times.

In the pachinko game machine PY3, when the same type of chance up effect is executed multiple times in a special mode effect, the chance up effect mode may change as the order of the unit effects increases so that the expectation of entering a jackpot game state suggested by the chance up effect mode (associated with the chance up effect mode) increases. In other words, throughout the entire special mode effect, the chance up effect mode changes so that the expectation of entering a jackpot game state increases. This change in the chance up effect mode so that the expectation of entering a jackpot game state increases is referred to as "promotion of chance up effect."

It is also configured by displaying an image (overall performance image) G64 that is executed on the display unit 50a and corresponds to the overall performance. Three types of performance modes (overall performance modes) are set for the overall performance: fourth performance mode A, fourth performance mode B, and fourth performance mode C. The overall performance modes are associated with the expectation of reaching the jackpot gaming state suggested by that performance mode. Regarding the overall performance modes, the expectation of reaching the jackpot gaming state is highest in the order of fourth performance mode A < fourth performance mode B < fourth performance mode C.

Note that, although specific examples will be described later, the summary performance image G64 is composed of lines from a specified female teacher character. The type of summary performance is associated with the content of the lines that compose the summary performance image G64. The fourth performance aspect A is the line "In one word, it's average," the fourth performance aspect B is the line "In one word, it's good," and the fourth performance aspect C is the line "In one word, it's excellent."

In addition, in the third embodiment, the presentation time of the special mode presentation (special mode presentation time) is set to 11 seconds. In detail, the presentation time of the special mode presentation start indication presentation is 0.5 seconds, the presentation time of each unit presentation is 3 seconds, the presentation time of the overall presentation is 1 second, and the presentation time of the special mode presentation end indication presentation is 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, when a special mode presentation is executed, the special mode presentation starts when 1 second has elapsed since the start of the special chart change presentation (normal change), and the special mode presentation ends during the normal change.

Next, an example of the control content related to the special mode effect will be described. Note that the control content described below is an example of the control content related to the special mode effect, and therefore the control content is not limited to the content below and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, in step S4306, when the game is in normal game mode and in normal presentation mode, the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines the special chart change presentation pattern, and then performs a special mode presentation execution judgment based on the special chart change start command to determine whether or not to execute the special mode presentation.

The special mode performance execution judgment is performed by referring to the special mode performance execution judgment table. An example of the configuration of the special mode performance execution judgment table is shown in FIG. 71 (A). As shown in FIG. 71 (A), the special mode performance execution judgment table is associated with the special chart change pattern. Specifically, as the special mode performance execution judgment table, a special mode performance execution judgment table for SP big win fluctuation, a special mode performance execution judgment table for L big win fluctuation, a special mode performance execution judgment table for SP miss fluctuation, a special mode performance execution judgment table for L miss fluctuation, a special mode performance execution judgment table for N miss fluctuation, a special mode performance execution judgment table for normal A miss fluctuation, a special mode performance execution judgment table for normal B miss fluctuation, and a special mode performance execution judgment table for normal C miss fluctuation are provided. Each special mode performance execution judgment table shown in FIG. 71 (A) is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for executing/not executing the special mode performance is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 71 (A).

As shown in FIG. 71 (A), "execute" may be selected in both the case of a jackpot variation and a miss variation. Therefore, when a special mode presentation is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot game state will be reached. In other words, the special mode presentation is a presentation that suggests that a jackpot game state will be reached. Also, "execute" may be selected in the case of a special pattern variation that results in a reach, but "execute" is never selected in the case of a special pattern variation that does not result in a reach. Therefore, when a special mode presentation is executed, a reach will always be reached. In other words, the special mode presentation is a presentation that suggests that a reach will be reached.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode effect execution determination that a special mode effect is to be executed, it then performs a chance up scenario determination based on the special chart change start command to determine a scenario (chance up scenario) that represents the changes in the effect mode regarding the three chance up effects in the special mode effect.

The chance-up scenarios that can be determined by the chance-up scenario judgment include scenario 1 (sc1), scenario 2 (sc2), scenario 3 (sc3), scenario 4 (sc4), and scenario 5 (sc5).

Scenario 1 is such that in the first unit performance, a chance up performance of a certain chance up type is executed in performance mode A (1A), in the second unit performance, a chance up performance of the same chance up type is executed in performance mode B (1B), and in the third unit performance, a chance up performance of the same chance up type is executed in performance mode C (1C).

Scenario 2 is such that in the first unit performance, a chance up performance of a certain chance up type is executed in performance mode A (1A), in the second unit performance, a chance up performance of the same chance up type is executed in performance mode B (1B), and in the third unit performance, a chance up performance of a different chance up type is executed in performance mode A (2A).

Scenario 3 is such that in the first unit performance, a chance up performance of a certain chance up type is executed in performance mode A (1A), in the second unit performance, a chance up performance of a different chance up type is executed in performance mode A (2A), and in the third unit performance, a chance up performance of the first chance up type is executed in performance mode B (1B).

Scenario 4 is such that in the first unit performance, a chance up performance of a certain chance up type is executed in performance mode A (1A), in the second unit performance, a chance up performance of a different chance up type is executed in performance mode A (2A), and in the third unit performance, a chance up performance of the second chance up type is executed in performance mode B (2B).

Scenario 5 is such that in the first unit performance, a chance up performance of a certain chance up type is executed in performance mode A (1A), in the second unit performance, a chance up performance of a different chance up type is executed in performance mode A (2A), and in the third unit performance, a chance up performance of a chance up type different from the first or second unit performance is executed in performance mode A (3A).

In this way, in scenario 1, a certain type of chance-up effect is executed three times and the effect mode eventually changes (promotes) to effect mode C; in scenarios 2, 3, and 4, although the process is different from each other, a certain type of chance-up effect is executed twice and the effect mode eventually changes (promotes) to effect mode B; and in scenario 5, a chance-up effect of each type is executed once and the effect mode does not change (promote).

The chance-up scenario judgment is performed by referring to the chance-up scenario judgment table. An example of the configuration of the chance-up scenario judgment table is shown in FIG. 71(B). As shown in FIG. 71(B), the chance-up scenario judgment table is associated with the special chart variation pattern. Specifically, the chance-up scenario judgment tables include a chance-up scenario judgment table for SP big win variation, a chance-up scenario judgment table for L big win variation, a chance-up scenario judgment table for SP miss variation, a chance-up scenario judgment table for L miss variation, and a chance-up scenario judgment table for N miss variation. Each chance-up scenario judgment table shown in FIG. 71(B) is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each chance-up scenario is the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 71(B).

As shown in FIG. 71(B), for SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, the selection rate for scenario 1 is the highest and the selection rate for scenario 5 is the lowest. Moreover, the ratio of the selection rate for scenario 1 to the selection rate for scenario 5 is quite high. Furthermore, for SP miss fluctuations, the selection rates for scenario 1 and scenario 5 are almost the same, while for L miss fluctuations, the selection rate for scenario 5 is the highest and the selection rate for scenario 1 is the lowest. Furthermore, for N miss fluctuations, the selection rate for scenario 1 is "0", and the selection rate for scenario 5 is the highest. Furthermore, for SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, the selection rates for each of scenarios 2 to 4 are higher than scenario 5 and lower than scenario 1. Furthermore, for SP miss fluctuations, the selection rates for each of scenarios 2 to 4 are higher than scenario 1 and scenario 5. Furthermore, for L miss fluctuations, the selection rates for each of scenarios 2 to 4 are higher than scenario 1 and scenario 5. Based on the above and the selection rates shown in FIG. 71(B), when scenario 1 is selected, the expectation of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state is highest, and when scenario 5 is selected, the expectation of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state is lowest. In other words, the likelihood of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state is highest in the following order: when the presentation mode changes (promotes) to presentation mode C in the special mode presentation > when the presentation mode changes (promotes) to presentation mode B > when the presentation mode does not change (promote) to presentation mode B or presentation mode C.

After completing the chance-up scenario determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 continues to perform chance-up type pattern determination to determine the chance-up type that constitutes the chance-up scenario based on the special chart variation start command and the chance-up scenario determination result. The chance-up type pattern determination is determined for each chance-up scenario.

In scenario 1, the same type of chance up effect is executed three times, and the effect mode changes (promotes) in the order of "effect mode A -> effect mode B -> effect mode C." However, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines scenario 1 in the chance up scenario determination, it determines the target chance up type to be either the first chance up effect, the second chance up effect, or the third chance up effect in the chance up type pattern determination.

In scenarios 2, 3, and 4, a certain type of chance up performance is executed twice, and another type of chance up performance is executed once, and the performance mode of the two occurrences changes (promotes) from "performance mode A to performance mode B." However, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines scenario 2 to 4 in the chance up scenario determination, it determines the chance up type of the two occurrences and the chance up type of the one occurrence to be either the first chance up performance, the second chance up performance, or the third chance up performance in the chance up type pattern determination.

In scenario 5, all types of chance-up effects are executed once each in performance mode A, but when scenario 5 is determined in the chance-up scenario judgment, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines in what order they will be executed in the chance-up type pattern judgment.

The chance-up type pattern determination is performed by referring to the chance-up type pattern determination table. An example of the configuration of the chance-up type pattern determination table is shown in FIG. 72 to FIG. 73. As shown in FIG. 72 to FIG. 73, the chance-up type pattern determination table is associated with the special chart variation pattern and the chance-up scenario determination result. Specifically, as the chance-up type pattern determination table, a chance-up type pattern determination table for SP big win variation, a chance-up type pattern determination table for L big win variation, a chance-up type pattern determination table for SP miss variation, a chance-up type pattern determination table for L miss variation, and a chance-up type pattern determination table for N miss variation are provided. And, the chance-up type pattern determination table other than for N miss variation is further divided into one for scenario 1, one for scenarios 2 to 4, and one for scenario 5. On the other hand, the chance-up type pattern determination table for N miss variation is further divided into one for scenarios 2 to 4, and one for scenario 5. Each chance-up type pattern determination table shown in Figures 72 to 73 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each chance-up type pattern (type P) is the predetermined selection rate shown in Figures 72 to 73. Note that "1st," "2nd," and "3rd" written in the notes of each chance-up type pattern determination table refer to "1st chance-up effect," "2nd chance-up effect," and "3rd chance-up effect," respectively.

As shown in Figures 72 to 73, for scenario 1, the third chance presentation is most likely to be selected in a jackpot fluctuation, and the third chance up presentation is least likely to be selected in a miss fluctuation. Therefore, when scenario 1 is executed in the third chance up presentation, there is the highest possibility of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state. Conversely, for scenario 1, the first chance presentation is least likely to be selected in a jackpot fluctuation, and the first chance up presentation is most likely to be selected in a miss fluctuation. Therefore, when scenario 1 is executed in the first chance up presentation, there is the lowest possibility of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state.

For scenario 2, the third chance performance is most likely to be selected twice in a jackpot fluctuation, and the third chance up performance is least likely to be selected twice in a miss fluctuation. Therefore, when scenario 2 is executed with the third chance up performance executed twice, there is the highest possibility of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state. Conversely, for scenario 2, the first chance performance is least likely to be selected twice in a jackpot fluctuation, and the first chance up performance is most likely to be selected twice in a miss fluctuation. Therefore, when scenario 1 is executed with the first chance up performance executed twice, there is the lowest possibility of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state.

After completing the chance-up type pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 next performs a general performance mode determination to determine the general performance mode based on the chance-up scenario determination result. The general performance mode determination is performed by referring to a general performance mode determination table. An example of the configuration of the general performance mode determination table is shown in FIG. 74. As shown in FIG. 74, the general performance mode determination table is associated with the chance-up scenario. Specifically, the general performance mode determination tables include a general performance mode determination table for scenario 1, a general performance mode determination table for scenarios 2 to 4, and a general performance mode determination table for scenario 5. Each general performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 74 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each general performance mode is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 74, for scenario 1, there is a 100% probability that the fourth performance mode C "Line: To sum it up in one word, excellent" will be selected, for scenarios 2 to 4, there is a 100% probability that the fourth performance mode B "Line: To sum it up in one word, good" will be selected, and for scenario 5, there is a 100% probability that the fourth performance mode A "Line: To sum it up in one word, average" will be selected. In other words, the overall performance mode is associated with the chance-up scenario.

Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 has completed the overall performance mode determination, it sets a command indicating the chance up scenario determination result (chance up scenario command), a command indicating the chance up type pattern determination result (chance up type pattern command), and a command indicating the overall performance mode (overall performance mode command) in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124, and also sets data indicating the chance up scenario determination result (chance up scenario data), data indicating the chance up type pattern determination result (chance up type pattern data), and data indicating the overall performance mode determination result (overall performance mode data) in a specified area of the performance RAM 124.

The chance-up scenario command, chance-up type pattern command, and overall performance mode command set in the output buffer are sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004). When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the chance-up scenario command, chance-up type pattern command, and overall performance mode command, it executes a special mode performance with the contents indicated by the chance-up scenario command, chance-up type pattern command, and overall performance mode command in the special chart change performance.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes special mode performance according to the contents indicated by the chance up scenario data, chance up type pattern data, and overall performance mode data.

Next, a specific example of the special mode performance will be described. Figures 75 to 79 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the special mode performance. Note that Figures 75 to 79 show the display unit 50a and the frame lamp 53 in a schematic representation. Also, here, it is assumed that a unit performance consisting of scenario 5 and type P32 is executed. That is, in the first unit performance, the first chance up performance (cut-in performance) of the first performance mode A is executed, in the second unit performance, the third chance up performance (frame lamp flash) of the third performance mode A is executed, and in the third unit performance, the second chance up performance (group crossing performance) of the second performance mode A is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that the overall performance is executed in the fourth performance mode A.

As shown in FIG. 75(A), the special mode effect starts one second after the special chart change effect, in other words, the change display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3, begins. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75(B), the background image G117 for the special mode effect is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. When the special mode effect starts, the special mode effect start suggestion effect is executed first in the background image G117 for the special mode effect. As the display content of the special mode effect start suggestion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a specific female teacher character appears and a text image is displayed in which the specific female teacher character utters the line "Let's start the chance up lesson," suggesting that the chance up effect, which constitutes the main part of the special mode effect, is about to start. In the third embodiment, the content of the special mode start suggestion effect is set to be the same regardless of the content of the unit effect and the overall effect that are performed after this.

In the special mode performance, when the special mode performance start suggestion performance is executed, the first unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the phrase "First period is a cut-in notice" indicating that the first chance-up performance (cut-in performance) will be executed is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the first chance-up type suggestion performance, and then, as shown in FIG. 76(B), the cut-in performance image G61 of the first performance type A is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the first chance-up performance. In addition, when the second chance up effect (group crossing effect) is executed as the first chance up effect, the phrase "First period is group preview" indicating that the second chance up effect (group crossing effect) will be executed is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the first chance up type suggestion effect, and when the third chance up effect (frame lamp flash) is executed, the phrase "First period is frame flash" indicating that the third chance up effect (frame lamp flash) will be executed is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the first chance up type suggestion effect. Also, "First period" included in the phrase related to the first chance up type suggestion effect corresponds to the unit effect order "First time".

When the first unit performance ends, the second unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the phrase "The second period is frame flash" is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the second chance-up type suggestion performance, indicating that the third chance-up performance (frame lamp flash) will be executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the frame lamp 53 emits light in the third performance mode A as the second chance-up performance, and an effect image G63 corresponding to the emission of the frame lamp 53 in the third performance mode A is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117. In addition, when the first chance up effect (cut-in effect) is executed as the second chance up effect, the phrase "Second period is a cut-in notice" indicating that the first chance up effect (cut-in effect) will be executed is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the second chance up type suggestion effect, and when the second chance up effect (group crossing effect) is executed, the phrase "Second period is a group notice" indicating that the second chance up effect (group crossing effect) will be executed is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the second chance up type suggestion effect. Also, "second period" included in the phrase related to the second chance up type suggestion effect corresponds to the unit effect order "second time".

When the second unit performance ends, the third unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the phrase "Third period is a group preview," indicating that the second chance-up performance (group crossing performance) will be executed, is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the third chance-up type suggestion performance, and then, as shown in FIG. 78(B), the group crossing performance image G62 of the second performance type A is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the third chance-up performance. In addition, when the first chance up effect (cut-in effect) is executed as the third chance up effect, the phrase "The third period is a cut-in notice" indicating that the first chance up effect (cut-in effect) will be executed is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the third chance up type suggestion effect, and when the third chance up effect (frame lamp flash) is executed, the phrase "The third period is a frame flash" indicating that the third chance up effect (frame lamp flash) will be executed is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the third chance up type suggestion effect. Also, "third period" included in the phrase related to the third chance up type suggestion effect corresponds to the unit effect order "third time".

When the third unit performance ends, the summary performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79(A), as a summary performance, a specified female teacher character appears in the background image G117 for special mode performance, and a summary performance image G64 of the fourth performance mode A is displayed. If the summary performance is performed in the fourth performance mode B, the display content of the summary performance image G64 is composed of the characters "In a word, it's good", which represent the dialogue associated with the fourth performance mode B, and if the summary performance is performed in the fourth performance mode C, the display content of the summary performance image G64 is composed of the characters "In a word, it's excellent", which represent the dialogue associated with the fourth performance mode C.

And as shown in Figure 79(B), as shown in Figure 79(C),

Next, a specific example of a special mode effect will be described when a unit effect consisting of scenario 3 and type P22 is executed, and a general effect of fourth effect mode B is executed. That is, in the first unit effect, the first chance up effect (cut-in effect) of first effect mode A is executed, in the second unit effect, the third chance up effect (frame lamp flash) of third effect mode A is executed, and in the third unit effect, the first chance up effect (cut-in effect) of first effect mode B is executed. Note that the effect contents of the special mode effect start indication effect, the first unit effect, and the second unit effect are the same as those in the previous specific examples (Figures 75 to 77), so illustrations are omitted here.

When the second unit performance ends, the third unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(A), the phrase "Third period is a cut-in announcement," indicating that the first chance-up performance (cut-in performance) will be executed, is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the third chance-up type suggestion performance, and then, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the cut-in performance image G61 of the first performance type B is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the third chance-up performance.

When the third unit performance ends, a summary performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a specific female teacher character appears in the background image G117 for the special mode performance as a summary performance, and a summary performance image G64 of the fourth performance type B is displayed. When the summary performance ends, a special mode performance end indication performance is executed, as in the previous specific example, and then the special mode performance ends (FIG. 79(B) to FIG. 79(C)).

Next, a specific example of a special mode effect will be described when a unit effect consisting of scenario 1 and type P13 is executed, and a general effect of fourth effect mode C is executed. That is, in the first unit effect, the second chance up effect (group crossing effect) of second effect mode A is executed, in the second unit effect, the second chance up effect (group crossing effect) of second effect mode B is executed, and in the third unit effect, the second chance up effect (group crossing effect) of second effect mode C is executed. Note that the effect content suggesting the start of the special mode effect is the same as in the previous specific example (Figure 75), so illustration here is omitted.

When the special mode start indication effect ends, the first unit effect starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(A), the phrase "First period is group preview," indicating that the second chance up effect (group crossing effect) will be executed, is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the first chance up type indication effect, and then, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the group crossing effect image G62 of the second effect type A is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the first chance up effect.

When the first unit performance ends, the second unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(C), the phrase "Second period is a group preview," indicating that the second chance-up performance (group crossing performance) will be executed, is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the second chance-up type suggestion performance, and then, as shown in FIG. 81(D), the group crossing performance image G62 of the second performance type B is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the second chance-up performance.

When the second unit performance ends, the third unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(E), the phrase "Third period is a group preview," indicating that the second chance-up performance (group crossing performance) will be executed, is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the third chance-up type indication performance, and then, as shown in FIG. 81(F), the group crossing performance image G62 of the second performance type C is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as the third chance-up performance.

When the third unit performance ends, a summary performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), a specific female teacher character appears in the background image G117 for the special mode performance as a summary performance, and a summary performance image G64 of the fourth performance type C is displayed. When the summary performance ends, a special mode performance end indication performance is executed, as in the previous specific example, and then the special mode performance ends (FIG. 79 (B) to FIG. 79 (C)).

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY3, a special mode effect (specific effect) may be executed which suggests the possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state), and in the special mode effect (specific effect), multiple types of specific effects (cut-in effect, crossing group effect, frame lamp flash: unit effect) can be executed three (N times) in succession, and there is a higher possibility of entering a jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state) when the same type of specific effect (cut-in effect, crossing group effect, frame lamp flash: unit effect) is executed three (N times) than when it is executed two (N-1 times). Therefore, it is possible to add variety to the special mode effect (specific effect) while drawing attention to the number of times each type of specific effect (unit effect) is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game. In addition, there are two types of specific effects (unit effects): a first specific effect (cut-in effect: first unit effect) and a second specific effect (group crossing effect: second unit effect). In a special mode effect (specific effect), a case where only the first specific effect (first unit effect) or the second specific effect (second unit effect) is executed alone is more likely to result in a jackpot game state (advantageous game state) than a case where both the first specific effect (first unit effect) and the second specific effect (second unit effect) are executed together. This allows the special mode effect (specific effect) to be emphasized while adding variety, thereby further increasing interest in the game. Furthermore, there are two types of special effects (unit effects): a first special effect (cut-in effect: first unit effect) and a second special effect (crossing-the-group effect: second unit effect). In the special mode effect (special effect), the second special effect (crossing-the-group effect: second unit effect) is more likely to result in a jackpot game state (advantageous game state) if it is executed three times (N times) than if the first special effect (cut-in effect: first unit effect) is executed three times (N times). This draws attention to the type of special effect (unit effect), further increasing interest in the game.

(Modification of the third embodiment)
Next, modified examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment will be described. Note that the modified examples described below can be appropriately combined with each other.

In the third embodiment, the special mode presentation is executed in the normal game state and in the normal presentation mode, but the game state and presentation mode in which the special mode presentation can be executed are not limited to the third embodiment and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, the special mode presentation may be executable in a plurality of types of game states and presentation modes. Furthermore, the special mode presentation may be executable in the special chart variation presentation related to the special chart 2 variation pattern.

The special mode effect starts one second after the special chart change effect starts, but this execution timing is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, multiple timings at which the special mode effect can be executed may be set. The duration of the special mode effect may also be changed as appropriate.

There are three types of chance-up performance, but the number of types is not particularly limited and may be two, four or more. Also, there are three performance modes for each chance-up performance, but the number of performance modes is not particularly limited and may be two, four or more. Furthermore, the number of performance modes may differ depending on the chance-up performance type.

In one special mode performance, the unit performance is executed three times, but this number of executions is not particularly limited and may be two, four or more. Also, for example, the number of executions of the unit performance in one special mode performance may be selectable from a plurality of numbers. In this case, as the number of executions increases, the possibility of upgrading to a performance mode with a higher expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game state and/or the expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game state may increase.

The presentation mode of the overall presentation is associated with the chance-up scenario, but is not completely associated with the chance-up scenario, and any overall presentation mode may be determined for each chance-up scenario. However, for example, in the case of scenario 1, the selection rate is highest in the order of fourth presentation mode C>fourth presentation mode B>fourth presentation mode A, and in the case of scenario 5, the selection rate is highest in the order of fourth presentation mode A>fourth presentation mode B>fourth presentation mode C. There may be a relationship between the selection rate of the overall presentation mode and the chance-up scenario. Also, in the special mode presentation, there are times when the overall presentation is executed and times when the overall presentation is not executed, and it may be configured so that when the overall presentation is executed, the possibility of entering a jackpot game state is higher. Furthermore, in the special mode presentation, the overall presentation may not be executed.

When each chance-up performance mode is promoted in a special mode performance, it is promoted one step at a time, such as from performance mode A to performance mode B, or from performance mode B to performance mode C, but it may also be promoted multiple steps, such as from performance mode A to performance mode C. Also, when the chance-up performance type is executed for the first time in the special mode performance, it is executed in performance mode A, but it may also be executed in performance mode B or C.

The type of the first chance up performance mode corresponds to the color of the cut-in performance image G61, the type of the second chance up performance mode corresponds to the number of baseball balls that make up the group crossing performance image G62, and the type of the third chance up performance mode corresponds to the light color of the frame lamp 53, but the elements that make up the performance associated with each performance mode type may be changed as appropriate.

The first chance up effect (cut-in effect), second chance up effect (group crossing effect), and third chance up effect (frame lamp flash), which constitute the special mode effects, may be executed in a form separate from the special mode effects.

Furthermore, the first chance up presentation mode, the second chance up presentation mode, and the third chance up presentation mode suggest the expectation of a jackpot game state, but the contents suggested are not limited to the expectation of a jackpot game state and may be changed as appropriate. For example, all or part of the first chance up presentation mode, the second chance up presentation mode, and the third chance up presentation mode may suggest the expectation of a specific presentation being executed, such as a presentation suggesting a high expectation of a jackpot game state, the expectation of a specific jackpot game in which a relatively large number of game balls can be obtained being executed, or the expectation of a game state advantageous to the player, such as a high probability state or a time-saving state, after the jackpot game state.

In the above example, the first chance up performance is composed of a cut-in performance, the second chance up performance is composed of a group crossing performance, and the third chance up performance is composed of a frame lamp flash, but the performance contents of the chance up performance are not limited to these and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the chance up performance may be composed of a change in the display mode of the reserved icon or a change in the display mode of the icon. In this case, after the chance up type suggestion performance is executed, the display mode of the reserved icon or the icon may be changed as a chance up performance. Furthermore, when the chance up performance is performed on the display unit 50a, the element of the performance to which the chance up performance mode is associated is not limited to color and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the chance up performance mode may be associated with the size of the image, the display position of the image, or the type (shape) of the character represented by the image. Furthermore, the chance up performance may be composed of the operation of the board movable body 55k. In this case, the chance up performance mode may be associated with the moving distance or operation mode of the board movable body 55k. Alternatively, the chance up performance may be composed of the output of sound from the speaker 52. In this case, the chance-up effect may be associated with the volume or type of sound.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the fourth embodiment will be mainly described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as the basic embodiment or the similar corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment is equipped with a cross button 40k in addition to the first performance button 41k and the second performance button 42k as operation means that can be operated by the player. Figure 82 is a partially enlarged plan view of the vicinity of the upper tray 34. As shown in Figure 82, the cross button 40k is provided near the left side of the first performance button 41k on the top surface of the upper tray 34, and is configured to be pressable in the same manner as the first performance button 41k.

The cross button 40k is shaped roughly like the letter "+" and has an upper operation section 40ku located on the upper side, a lower operation section 40kd located on the lower side, a right operation section 40kr located on the right side, and a left operation section 40kl located on the left side, and each of the operation sections 40ku, 40kd, 40kr, and 40kl that make up the cross button 40k can be pressed independently. In the following, the upper operation section 40ku and the lower operation section 40kd of the cross button 40k will be collectively referred to as the "up/down button 40k1," and the right operation section 40kr and the left operation section 40kl of the cross button 40k will be collectively referred to as the "left/right button 40k2."

The cross button 40k is also connected to a cross button sensor 40a that detects operations on the cross button 40k. The cross button 40k and the cross button sensor 40a are configured as an integrated unit, and the cross button 40k and the cross button sensor 40a are collectively referred to as the "cross button device 40."

Next, the electrical configuration of the performance control board 120 in the fourth embodiment will be described. Figure 83 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control board 120 in the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the cross button sensor 40a is connected to the performance control board 120, similar to the first performance button sensor 41a and the second performance button sensor 42a. The cross button sensor 40a can detect which part of the cross button 40k, specifically, which of the upper operation unit 40ku, the lower operation unit 40kd, the right operation unit 40kr, and the left operation unit 40kl, has been pressed. In other words, the cross button sensor 40a has an upper operation unit sensor 40au that detects an operation on the upper operation unit 40ku, a lower operation unit sensor 40ad that detects an operation on the lower operation unit 40kd, a right operation unit sensor 40ar that detects an operation on the right operation unit 40kr, and a left operation unit sensor 40al that detects an operation on the left operation unit 40kl.

When each operation unit sensor 40au, 40ad, 40ar, 40al detects an operation on each operation unit 40ku, 40kd, 40kr, 40kl, it outputs a signal (upper operation unit detection signal, lower operation unit detection signal, right operation unit detection signal, left operation unit detection signal) indicating that an operation has been performed on that part as the detection content to the performance control board 120. In the following, the upper operation unit sensor 40au and the lower operation unit sensor 40ad of the cross button sensor 40a are collectively referred to as the "up and down button sensor 40a1", and the right operation unit sensor 40ar and the left operation unit sensor 40al of the cross button 40k are collectively referred to as the "left and right button sensor 40a2".

As will be described in detail later, the pachinko gaming machine PY4 is configured so that the player can set (customize) the specific items related to the performance as desired. In the pachinko gaming machine PY4, there are five items of customizable specific items related to the performance: premium up mode, one shot notification, auto button, 3D, and pre-reading chance. In the following, these customizable specific items related to the performance may be referred to as "performance specific items." Furthermore, "premium up mode," "one shot notification," "auto button," "3D," and "pre-reading chance" may be referred to as "first performance specific item," "second performance specific item," "third performance specific item," "fourth performance specific item," and "fifth performance specific item," respectively. Furthermore, the ability to set each specific item related to the performance as desired by the player may be referred to as a "custom function."

The setting and control of the performance specific items is mainly performed by the performance control microcomputer 121. For this purpose, the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 is provided with a performance specific item memory unit 128 that stores information related to the performance specific items. The performance specific item memory unit 128 has a first specific item memory unit 128a that stores information related to the first performance specific item, a second specific item memory unit 128b that stores information related to the second performance specific item, a third specific item memory unit 128c that stores information related to the third performance specific item, a fourth specific item memory unit 128d that stores information related to the fourth performance specific item, and a fifth specific item memory unit 128e that stores information related to the fifth performance specific item.

Next, we will explain the customization functions of the pachinko gaming machine PY4.

The "premium up mode" constituting the first performance specification item is a mode in which the frequency of appearance of premium performances executable on the pachinko gaming machine PY4 is increased. A specific description of the premium performances will be omitted here, but it is assumed that among the performances executable on the pachinko gaming machine PY4, multiple types of premium performances are set that suggest a high possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Essentially, in other words, the default state is that the appearance rate of premium performances on the pachinko gaming machine PY4 is set extremely low (for example, less than 5%), but by setting the premium up mode to ON (enabling) with the custom function, the appearance rate of premium performances can be increased.

The "one shot announcement" constituting the second performance specific item is an announcement that an announcement of a jackpot, such as a so-called "P-flag", can be made during the special chart change presentation if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot. A detailed explanation of the one shot announcement will be omitted here, but essentially, in other words, the default state is that the pachinko game machine PY4 is set so that a one shot announcement may be made, but by setting the one shot announcement to OFF (disabling) it using the custom function, it is possible to prevent the one shot announcement from being made.

The "auto button" constituting the third performance specification refers to a mode in which, while an operation prompting performance is being performed for various operation contents such as normal single taps, repeated taps, and long presses on the first performance button 41k or the second performance button 42k, an operation result performance is executed even if the operation means (first performance button 41k, second performance button 42k) that is the operation target of the operation prompting performance is not operated. Here, a specific explanation of the auto button is omitted, but basically, in other words, in the default state, the auto button is not set, and by setting the auto button to ON (enabling) with the custom function, when an operation prompting performance is being executed, the operation result performance can be executed on the first performance button 41k or the second performance button 42k even if the operation indicated by the operation prompting performance is not performed.

The "3D" that constitutes the fourth optional performance setting item is a mode in which 3D images can be viewed with the naked eye. Here, a detailed description of the image display device 50 is omitted, but the image display device 50 according to the fourth embodiment is configured as a liquid crystal monitor compatible with naked eye 3D stereoscopic vision. A description of specific performance examples using naked eye 3D stereoscopic vision is omitted, but basically, in other words, 3D is set as the default state, and the background image G115 for SP reach, the background image G114 for L reach, and specific preview performances, etc. are displayed in naked eye 3D stereoscopic vision, but by setting 3D to OFF (disabling) with the custom function, the background image G115 for SP reach, the background image G114 for L reach, and specific preview performances, etc. can be displayed in 2D.

The "preview chance" constituting the fifth optional performance setting item is a preview performance that is executed based on a preview judgment. A detailed explanation of the preview chance will be omitted here, but basically, in other words, the default state is set so that the preview chance may be executed in the pachinko gaming machine PY4, and by setting the preview chance to OFF (disabled) using the custom function, it is possible to prevent the preview chance from being executed.

In this way, the pachinko game machine PY4 is configured so that the player can set the first to fifth performance specific items at will. For example, in the default state after the RAM clear switch 192 is operated to perform a so-called "RAM clear," the premium up mode is set to OFF as the first performance specific item, the one-shot announcement is set to ON as the second performance specific item, the auto button is set to OFF as the third performance specific item, 3D is set to ON as the fourth performance specific item, and the pre-reading chance is set to ON as the fifth performance specific item. Note that, with respect to these default states, the premium up mode being set to ON as the first performance specific item, the one-shot announcement being set to OFF as the second performance specific item, the auto button being set to ON as the third performance specific item, 3D being set to OFF as the fourth performance specific item, and the pre-reading chance being set to OFF as the fifth performance specific item are each referred to as a "customized state." Furthermore, if any one of the first through fifth performance specific items is in a customized state, the pachinko gaming machine PY4 as a whole is also considered to be in a customized state.

Then, as the default state for various performance specific items, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns off a flag (premium up mode flag) indicating that the premium up mode is set to ON in the first specific item memory unit 128a, turns off a flag (single announcement prohibition flag) indicating that the one-shot announcement is set to OFF (prohibition of one-shot announcement) in the second specific item memory unit 128b, turns off a flag (auto button flag) indicating that the auto button is set to ON in the third specific item memory unit 128c, turns off a flag (3D prohibition flag) indicating that 3D is set to OFF (prohibition of 3D) in the fourth specific item memory unit 128d, and turns off a flag (preview prohibition flag) indicating that the look-ahead chance is set to OFF (prohibition of look-ahead chance) in the fifth specific item memory unit 128e. Therefore, in the customized state, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the premium up mode flag in the first specific item memory unit 128a, turns on the one-shot notification prohibition flag in the second specific item memory unit 128b, turns on the auto button flag in the third specific item memory unit 128c, turns on the 3D prohibition flag in the fourth specific item memory unit 128d, and turns on the pre-reading prohibition flag in the fifth specific item memory unit 128e.

Next, operations related to the custom function in the pachinko gaming machine PY4 will be described. Operations related to the custom function include non-play custom operations that can be performed when no game is being played, and in-game custom operations that can be performed when a game is being played. Non-play custom operations can be performed using the cross button 40k and the first effect button 41k, and in-game custom operations can be performed using the cross button 40k.

The display of the custom function on the display unit 50a will be described below. When the cross button 40k or the first performance button 41k is operated as an operation related to the custom function, various detection signals (upper operation unit detection signal, lower operation unit detection signal, right operation unit detection signal, left operation unit detection signal, first performance button detection signal) are input to the performance control board 120. When various detection signals are input, the performance control microcomputer 121 immediately transmits a command indicating the detection signal to the image control board 140. Then, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 moves the cursors G76, G71c, G72c, G73c, G74c, G75c, and G83 described later appropriately as shown in the figure based on the command indicating the detection signal, in other words, in response to the operation of the cross button 40k or the first performance button 41k via the performance control board 120.

First, we will explain the non-play custom operation. Figures 84 to 87 are explanatory diagrams explaining the non-play custom operation. In the pachinko game machine PY4, for example, when the special chart variable display and the jackpot game are not being performed (waiting for customers state), as shown in Figure 84 (A), when the waiting for customers demo video G100 is displayed over the entire display unit 50a, when the first effect button 41k is operated, the effect control microcomputer 121 transitions to a screen (setting selection screen) where a non-play custom operation or an operation to change the volume or light intensity can be selected, as shown in Figure 84 (B).

On the setting selection screen, the background image related to the game that was displayed immediately before the waiting state was entered (in FIG. 84(B), the first normal background image G111) is displayed across the entire display section 50a, and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (in FIG. 84(B), "9, 3, 5") that were stopped and displayed immediately before the waiting state was entered are displayed superimposed on the background image, and an image (screen transition explanation image) G70 explaining how to transition to a screen related to custom operations during non-play and a screen related to operations for changing the volume and light intensity is displayed superimposed on the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3.

In the screen transition explanation image G70, a figure is displayed in which the up and down buttons 40k1 on the cross button 40k are highlighted, and the explanation "Move to the menu screen" is displayed to the right of the figure, and a figure is displayed in which the left and right buttons 40k2 on the cross button 40k are highlighted, and the explanation "You can change the volume and light intensity" is displayed to the right of the figure. The screen transition explanation image G70 explains that operating the up and down buttons 40k1 transitions to a screen related to non-play custom operations (non-play custom operation screen), and operating the left and right buttons 40k2 transitions to a screen related to operations for changing the volume and light intensity.

Therefore, when the up/down button 40k1 is operated while the screen transition explanation image G70 is displayed, the performance control microcomputer 121 switches from the setting selection screen to the non-play custom operation screen. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays the non-play custom operation screen G102 on the display unit 50a.

Figure 85 is a diagram showing a specific example of a non-play custom operation screen. In the non-play custom operation screen G102, an area (first performance specific area) G71 for operating a custom function related to the first performance specific item (premium up mode), an area (second performance specific area) G72 for operating a custom function related to the second performance specific item (one-shot announcement), an area (third performance specific area) G73 for operating a custom function related to the third performance specific item (auto button), an area (fourth performance specific area) G74 for operating a custom function related to the fourth performance optional setting item (3D), and an area (fifth performance specific area) G75 for operating a custom function related to the fifth performance optional setting item (preview chance) are formed in approximately the same horizontally elongated rectangular shape. In the fourth embodiment, in approximately the upper half of the non-play custom operation screen G102, the first performance specific item area G71, the second performance specific item area G72, the third performance specific item area G73, the fourth performance specific item area G74, and the fifth performance specific item area G75 are arranged side by side from top to bottom.

Inside each of the various performance specific item areas G71, G72, G73, G74, and G75, the name representing the performance specific item (premium up mode, one shot announcement, auto button, 3D, pre-reading chance) is displayed left justified. In addition, inside each of the various performance specific item areas G71, G72, G73, G74, and G75, there are formed default selection sections G71a, G72a, G73a, G74a, and G75a that indicate that the default state has been selected for each performance specific item, and customization selection sections G71b, G72b, G73b, G74b, and G75b that indicate that a customized state has been selected.

In the first performance specification area G71, a first default selection section G71a is formed, which indicates that the first performance specification is in the default state (premium up mode is set to OFF). Furthermore, to the right of the first default selection section G71a, a first customization selection section G71b is formed, which indicates that the first performance specification is in the customized state (premium up mode is set to ON).

In the second performance specific item area G72, a second default selection section G72a is formed, which indicates that the second performance specific item is in the default state (instant announcement is set to ON). Furthermore, to the right of the second default selection section G72a, a second customization selection section G72b is formed, which indicates that the second performance specific item is in the customized state (instant announcement is set to OFF).

The third performance specific item area G73 has a third default selection section G73a formed therein, which indicates that the third performance specific item is in the default state (the AUTO button is set to OFF). Furthermore, to the right of the third default selection section G73a, a third customization selection section G73b is formed, which indicates that the third performance specific item is in the customized state (the AUTO button is set to ON).

In the fourth performance specific item area G74, a fourth default selection section G74a is formed, which indicates that the fourth performance specific item is in the default state (3D is set ON). Furthermore, to the right of the fourth default selection section G74a, a fourth customization selection section G74b is formed, which indicates that the fourth performance specific item is in the customized state (3D is set OFF).

The fifth performance specific item area G75 has a fifth default selection section G75a formed therein, which indicates that the fifth performance specific item is in the default state (pre-reading chance is set to ON). Furthermore, to the right of the fifth default selection section G75a, there is a fifth customization selection section G75b formed therein, which indicates that the fifth performance specific item is in the customized state (pre-reading chance is set to OFF).

In the fourth embodiment, the first default selection section G71a, the first customization selection section G71b, the second default selection section G72a, the second customization selection section G72b, the third default selection section G73a, the third customization selection section G73b, the fourth default selection section G74a, the fourth customization selection section G74b, the fifth default selection section G75a, and the fifth customization selection section G75b are formed in substantially the same horizontally elongated rectangular shape. Also, the first default selection section G71a, the second default selection section G72a, the third default selection section G73a, the fourth default selection section G74a, and the fifth default selection section G75a are displayed side by side in the vertical direction (aligned in the horizontal direction), and the first customization selection section G71b, the second customization selection section G72b, the third customization selection section G73b, the fourth customization selection section G74b, and the fifth customization selection section G75b are displayed side by side in the vertical direction (aligned in the horizontal direction).

In addition, sub-cursors G71c, G72c, G73c, G74c, and G75c are displayed inside the first performance specific item area G71, the second performance specific item area G72, the third performance specific item area G73, the fourth performance specific item area G74, and the fifth performance specific item area G75, respectively, to indicate the state (default state/customized state) of each selected performance specific item. The sub-cursors G71c to G75c for each performance specific item area G71 to G75 are configured as frame-shaped figures that overlap exactly with the outer perimeter of the default selection section G71a to G75a and the customization selection section G71b to G75b.

When each of the performance specific items in the entire pachinko gaming machine PY4 is in a completely default state and the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 85, the sub-cursors G71c to G75c for each of the performance specific item areas G71 to G75 are deemed to select the default selection sections G71a to G75a. Specifically, when the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the sub-cursor (first sub-cursor) G71c relating to the first performance specification is displayed overlapping exactly with the first default selection section G71a, the sub-cursor (second sub-cursor) G72c relating to the second performance specification is displayed overlapping exactly with the second default selection section G72a, the sub-cursor (third sub-cursor) G73c relating to the third performance specification is displayed overlapping exactly with the third default selection section G73a, the sub-cursor (fourth sub-cursor) G74c relating to the fourth performance specification is displayed overlapping exactly with the fourth default selection section G74a, and the sub-cursor (fifth sub-cursor) G75c relating to the fifth performance specification is displayed overlapping exactly with the fifth default selection section G75a.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY4, by operating the left and right buttons 40k2, it is possible to move each sub-cursor G71c to G75c individually between each default selection section G71a to G75a and each customization selection section G71b to G75b, that is, it is possible to change each performance specification item individually between the default state and the customized state. However, this operation can be performed when the performance specification item in question is selected.

To the left of each of the performance specific item areas G71 to G75, a main cursor G76 can be displayed to indicate that the performance specific item has been selected. For the performance specific item related to the performance specific item area G71 to G75 to the left of which the main cursor G76 is located, the default state or customized state can be selected. Note that the display content of the main cursor G76 can be set as appropriate, but in the fourth embodiment, the main cursor G76 is configured as a black-filled equilateral triangle with vertices located at the top, bottom, and right.

When the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the main cursor G76 is displayed to the left of the first performance specification area G71. In other words, when the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the first performance specification is initially selected.

Below the fifth performance specification area G75, an explanatory text display area G77 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle, which displays explanatory text relating to the performance specification selected by the main cursor G76. Therefore, when the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed, an explanatory text relating to the first performance specification (premium up mode) (in the fourth embodiment, "You can select the frequency of premium performance") is displayed in the explanatory text display area G77.

In addition, after the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the main cursor G76 can be moved by operating the up and down buttons 40k1; in other words, the performance specific item to be selected can be changed. Between the performance specific item areas G71 to G75, operating the lower operation unit 40kd once moves the main cursor G76 downward by one performance specific item area G71 to G75. On the other hand, between the performance specific item areas G71 to G75, operating the upper operation unit 40ku once moves the main cursor G76 upward by one performance specific item area G71 to G75.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when the lower operation unit 40kd is operated once from the situation shown in FIG. 85, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one space and is positioned to the left of the second performance specific item area G72, the second performance specific item is selected, and an explanation (in the fourth embodiment, "You can select whether or not to display a one-shot announcement") regarding the second performance specific item (one-shot announcement) is displayed in the explanation display area G77. Note that, when the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), the situation shown in FIG. 86(A) is obtained.

Furthermore, when the lower operation unit 40kd is operated once from the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), as shown in FIG. 86(C), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one space and is positioned to the left of the third performance specific item area G73, the third performance specific item is selected, and an explanation (in the fourth embodiment, "You can select whether or not to use the auto button") regarding the third performance specific item (auto button) is displayed in the explanation display area G77. Note that when the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), the situation shown in FIG. 86(B) is reached.

Furthermore, when the lower operation unit 40kd is operated once from the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), as shown in FIG. 86(D), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one space and is positioned to the left of the fourth performance specific item area G74, the fourth performance specific item is selected, and an explanation (in the fourth embodiment, "You can select whether or not to have 3D") regarding the fourth performance specific item (3D) is displayed in the explanation display area G77. Note that when the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the situation shown in FIG. 86(C) is reached.

Furthermore, when the lower operation unit 40kd is operated once from the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), as shown in FIG. 86(E), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one space and is positioned to the left of the fifth performance specific item area G75, the fifth performance specific item is selected, and an explanation (in the fourth embodiment, "You can choose whether or not to have a pre-reading performance") regarding the fifth performance specific item (pre-reading chance) is displayed in the explanation display area G77. Note that when the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), the situation shown in FIG. 86(D) is reached.

Although not shown, when the right operation unit 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(A), the first sub-cursor G71c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the first customization selection unit G71b, and the customized state (premium up mode ON setting) is selected for the first performance specification item. On the other hand, when the left operation unit 40kl is operated once in that situation, the first sub-cursor G71c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the first default selection unit G71a, and the default state (premium up mode OFF setting) is selected for the first performance specification item.

Although not shown, in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), when the right operation unit 40kr is operated once, the second sub-cursor G72c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the second customization selection unit G72b, and the customized state (single announcement OFF setting) is selected for the second performance specification item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation unit 40kl is operated once, the second sub-cursor G72c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the second default selection unit G72a, and the default state (single announcement ON setting) is selected for the second performance specification item.

Although not shown, in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), when the right operation unit 40kr is operated once, the third sub-cursor G73c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the third customization selection unit G73b, and the customized state (AUTO button ON setting) is selected for the third performance specification item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation unit 40kl is operated once, the third sub-cursor G73c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the third default selection unit G73a, and the default state (AUTO button OFF setting) is selected for the third performance specification item.

Although not shown, when the right operation unit 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the fourth sub-cursor G74c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the fourth customization selection unit G74b, and the customized state (3D OFF setting) is selected for the fourth performance specification item. On the other hand, when the left operation unit 40kl is operated once in that situation, the fourth sub-cursor G74c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the fourth default selection unit G74a, and the default state (3D ON setting) is selected for the fourth performance specification item.

Although not shown, in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), when the right operation unit 40kr is operated once, the fifth sub-cursor G75c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the fifth customization selection unit G75b, and the customized state (OFF setting of pre-reading chance) is selected for the fifth performance specific item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation unit 40kl is operated once, the fifth sub-cursor G75c moves to the left and is displayed overlapping the fifth default selection unit G75a, and the default state (ON setting of pre-reading chance) is selected for the fifth performance specific item.

The performance control board 120 (performance control microcomputer 121) can store the position of the main cursor G76, in other words, the performance specification item selected by the main cursor G76, in the performance RAM 124. As described above, the non-play custom operation screen G102 is always displayed with the first performance specification item selected, so when the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the first performance specification item is currently selected in a specified area of the performance RAM 124. Then, when the lower operation unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86 (A), the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the second performance specification item is selected in a specified area of the performance RAM 124. 86(B), the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the third performance specific item has been selected in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, while when an upper operation unit detection signal is input, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the first performance specific item has been selected in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. Also, when a lower operation unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in Fig. 86(C), the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the fourth performance specific item has been selected in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, while when an upper operation unit detection signal is input, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the second performance specific item has been selected in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. Furthermore, when the lower operation unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the fifth performance specific item has been selected in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, while when the upper operation unit detection signal is input, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the third performance specific item has been selected in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. Also, when the upper operation unit detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), the performance control microcomputer 121 stores information indicating that the fourth performance specific item has been selected in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124.

When the left or right button 40k2 is operated, the performance control microcomputer 121 appropriately updates the information stored in the performance specific item memory unit 128. For example, in the completely default state as shown in FIG. 85 (FIG. 86(A)), the performance control microcomputer 121 turns off the premium up mode flag, the one-shot notification prohibition flag, the auto button flag, the 3D prohibition flag, and the pre-reading prohibition flag.

For example, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a right operation unit detection signal in the situation shown in FIG. 86(A), it turns the premium up mode flag ON. Conversely, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a left operation unit detection signal in the situation where the premium up mode flag is ON, it turns the premium up mode flag OFF. Similarly, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a right operation unit detection signal in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), it turns the one-shot notification prohibition flag ON. Conversely, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a left operation unit detection signal in the situation where the one-shot notification prohibition flag is ON, it turns the one-shot notification prohibition flag OFF. Also, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a right operation unit detection signal in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), it turns the auto button flag ON. Conversely, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a left operation unit detection signal while the auto button flag is ON, it turns the auto button flag OFF. Furthermore, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a right operation unit detection signal while the performance control microcomputer 121 is in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), it turns the 3D prohibition flag ON. Conversely, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a left operation unit detection signal while the 3D prohibition flag is ON, it turns the 3D prohibition flag OFF. Furthermore, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a right operation unit detection signal while the performance control microcomputer 121 is in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), it turns the read-ahead prohibition flag ON. Conversely, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a left operation unit detection signal while the read-ahead prohibition flag is ON, it turns the read-ahead prohibition flag OFF.

In addition, below the explanatory text display area G77, an end section G78 indicating that the operation related to the non-play custom function, in other words, the non-play custom operation screen G102 has been selected to be closed, and an initialization section G79 indicating that each performance specific item has been selected to be set to the default state are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The end section G78 and the initialization section G79 can be selected by the main cursor G76. As shown in FIG. 86 (E), when the lower operation section 40kd is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is arranged to the left of the fifth performance specific item area G75, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the end section G78. In addition, when the right operation section 40kr is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is arranged to the left of the end section G78, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the initialization section G79. Furthermore, when the left operation unit 40kl is operated while the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of the initialization unit G79, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the end unit G78. Also, when the top operation unit 40ku is operated while the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of the end unit G78, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the fifth performance specific item area G75.

When the first effect button 41k is operated while the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of the end section G78, the non-play custom operation screen G102 switches to a setting selection screen, non-play custom operations can no longer be performed, and the state (default state/customized state) of each effect specific item indicated by the position of the sub-cursors G71c to G75c in each effect specific item area G71 to G75 at that time is determined.

For example, suppose that the player finally selects the first customization selection section G71b, the second sub-cursor G72c selects the second default selection section G72a, the third sub-cursor G73c selects the third customization selection section G73b, the fourth sub-cursor G74c selects the fourth default selection section G74a, and the fifth sub-cursor G75c selects the fifth customization selection section G75b, in other words, the customized state is selected for the first performance specific item, the third performance specific item, and the fifth performance specific item, and the default state is selected for the second performance specific item and the fourth performance specific item, as shown in FIG. 87(A). Also, suppose that the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of the end section G78.

When the first effect button 41k is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 87(A), the non-play custom operation screen G102 is switched to a setting selection screen as shown in FIG. 87(B). This makes it impossible to perform non-play custom operations, and the state of the various effect specific items is confirmed. However, as shown in FIG. 87(A), when the non-play custom operation screen G102 is switched to the setting selection screen with even one customized state selected among the effect specific items, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on a flag (effect customization state flag) in a specified area of the effect RAM 124 indicating that the pachinko gaming machine PY4 as a whole is in a customized state (not in a completely default state) for the effect specific items.

When the player starts playing from the situation shown in FIG. 87(B), for example, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 and the special chart 1 variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the screen transition explanation image G70 disappears, the setting selection screen is switched to the game screen, and the stopped display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 starts to change (special chart variable display). In this way, when the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed and the pachinko game machine PY4 as a whole is changed from the default state to the customized state by non-play custom operation, the first time the special chart variable display is performed, the in-play custom operation image G80 described later is not displayed.

Next, we will explain custom operations during gameplay. Figures 88 to 90 are explanatory diagrams explaining custom operations during gameplay.

After the situation shown in FIG. 87(C), for example, suppose that multiple special chart 1 variable displays are executed in succession, and finally, a stop display of special chart 1 in a state indicating a miss is executed, and accordingly, the stop display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a state indicating a miss is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 88(A), if 30 seconds continue without the next special chart 1 variable display being executed, in other words, if the customer waiting state in which the special chart 1 variable display or the jackpot game is not executed continues for 30 seconds, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays the customer waiting demo video G100 on the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 88(B).

Next, a customer waiting demo video G100 as shown in FIG. 88(B) is displayed, and then the player starts playing again. For example, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 and the variable display of special chart 1 starts, the customer waiting demo video G100 is switched to the first normal background image G111 as shown in FIG. 88(C), and the variable display of performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 appears. At this timing, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays an image for performing custom operations during play (custom operation image during play) G80 superimposed on the first normal background image G111 in the upper left corner of the display unit 50a.

In this way, after the customized state is entered by the operation on the non-play custom operation screen G102 (non-play custom operation), the special chart variable display is performed once, and then the state changes to the customer waiting state again and the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed. From that state, when the special chart variable display is executed and the display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 changes (special chart variable display) is performed, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the in-play custom operation image G80 to enable the in-play custom operation. In other words, when the special chart variable display (display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 changing, special chart variable display) starts from the customer waiting demo video G100 that was first displayed in the customer waiting state that was newly started (transitioned to) after the above-mentioned performance customization state flag was turned ON, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the in-play custom operation image G80 to enable the in-play custom operation.

Note that since this is a "customer waiting state newly started (transitioned to) after the performance customization state flag was turned ON", for example, even if the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed without transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 87 (B) to the state shown in FIG. 87 (C), the customer waiting demo video G100 is the customer waiting demo video G100 that was first displayed in the customer waiting state in which the player was already present when the performance customization state flag was turned ON, and is not the customer waiting demo video G100 that was displayed in the customer waiting state that was newly started (transitioned to) after the performance customization state flag was turned ON, so even if a special chart variable display (variable display of performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, special chart variable performance) is started from such a customer waiting demo video G100, the in-game custom operation image G80 will not be displayed. Furthermore, for example, even if the customer waiting state is first started after the performance customization state flag is turned ON, and the special chart variable display (variable display of performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, special chart variable display) is started without the customer waiting demo video G100 being displayed, the in-game custom operation image G80 is not displayed. In other words, the conditions for the in-game custom operation image G80 to be displayed, in other words the conditions for in-game custom operation to be possible, include at least the special chart variable display being performed after the customized state is entered, and the special chart variable display (variable display of performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, special chart variable display) starting from the state in which the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed.

Also, when the in-play custom operation image G80 is displayed, the microcomputer 121 for controlling the effects turns the aforementioned effect customization state flag OFF. Also, in the fourth embodiment, for example, when the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed as shown in FIG. 87(A), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 and the special chart 1 variable display starts, the situation becomes as shown in FIG. 87(C). Note that this transition of the situation is the same whether the performance specific items are in a completely default state or at least partially in a customized state in the non-play custom operation screen G102. Also, if the customized state is set at that time, the microcomputer 121 for controlling the effects turns the effect customization state flag ON when the special chart 1 variable display starts. In other words, the start of the special chart variable display when the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed has the same function as the operation of the first effect button 41k when the main cursor G76 is located to the left of the end part G78.

The in-game custom operation image G80 shown in FIG. 88(C) is a simplified version. Here, the in-game custom operation image G80 will be explained in detail. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the in-game custom operation image G80.

Figure 89 (A) shows the state of the in-game custom operation image G80 immediately after it is displayed. As shown in Figure 89 (A), the in-game custom operation image G80 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle overall, and inside it is written "Do you want to continue customization?". That is, the in-game custom operation image G80 functions as a performance that asks whether or not to continue the customized state of the performance specific items. Furthermore, inside the in-game custom operation image G80, there are provided a continuation selection section G81 that indicates the selection of continuing the customized state, an end selection section G82 that indicates the selection of ending the customized state, a cursor G83 that can be moved between the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82 and indicates that the one that is placed is selected, and a remaining time display section G84 that indicates the remaining time that the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed (remaining in-game customization time). In addition, the display content "Do you want to continue customization?", which is used by the in-game custom operation image G80 to function as a presentation asking whether or not to continue the customized state of the presentation specific items, may be changed as appropriate to the extent that the player can recognize that they are being asked whether or not to continue the customized state of the presentation specific items.

In-game custom operations can be performed when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, and the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed for three seconds. In other words, the effective time for in-game custom operations is three seconds. The remaining time display section G84, which shows the remaining in-game custom time, is made up of a linear progress bar, and changes over time so that the player can easily understand the remaining in-game custom time.

The continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82 are formed in the same substantially horizontally elongated rectangular shape and are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In detail, the continuation selection section G81 is arranged on the left side, and the end selection section G82 is arranged on the right side. The cursor G83 is configured as a frame-shaped figure that overlaps exactly with the outer periphery of the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82, and is displayed overlapping with the outer periphery of the end selection section G82 when the in-play custom operation image G80 is displayed. In other words, when the in-play custom operation image G80 is displayed, the end of the customized state is selected. Note that the line related to the cursor G83 is much thicker than the outer periphery of the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82, so the player can easily understand whether the cursor G83 overlaps with the continuation selection section G81 or the end selection section G82.

When the custom operation image G80 is displayed during gameplay, the left and right buttons 40k2 can be operated to move the cursor G83 alternately between the continue selection section G81 and the end selection section G82, in other words, to alternately select between continuing customization and ending customization. When the cursor G83 is displayed overlapping the end selection section G82 and the end selection section G82 is selected, if the left operation section 40kl is operated, the cursor G83 moves to the left and overlaps the continue selection section G81, and the continue selection section G81 is selected. On the other hand, when the cursor G83 is displayed overlapping the continue selection section G81 and the right operation section 40kr is operated, the cursor G83 moves to the right and overlaps the end selection section G82, and the end selection section G82 is selected.

For example, when the cursor G83 shown in FIG. 89(A) selects the end selection section G82, and a short time (0.75 seconds) elapses before the state shown in FIG. 89(B) appears, if the left operation section 40kl is operated, the cursor G83 goes into a state of selecting the continue selection section G81, as shown in FIG. 89(C). Furthermore, if the right operation section 40kr is then operated, the cursor G83 goes into a state of selecting the end selection section G82, as shown in FIG. 89(D).

As shown in Figures 89(A) to 89(D), the portion of the remaining time display section G84 that indicates the remaining in-play customization time (the colored portion in Figure 89) shrinks toward the left as time passes since the in-play customization operation image G80 is displayed. Then, when the remaining in-play customization time reaches 0 seconds, the portion of the remaining time display section G84 that indicates the remaining in-play customization time disappears, as shown in Figure 89(E).

Then, as soon as the portion showing the remaining time in the in-play customization related to the remaining time display section G84 disappears, the in-play customization operation image G80 is erased as shown in FIG. 90. Note that, as shown in FIG. 89(A) to FIG. 89(E), even if the left and right buttons 40k2 are operated to move the cursor G83 between the continue selection section G81 and the end selection section G82 as time passes after the in-play customization operation image G80 is displayed, the special chart change presentation is appropriately unaffected by this on the display section 50a.

The performance control microcomputer 121 also grasps in real time whether the cursor G83 is selecting the continue selection section G81 or the end selection section G82. It then controls the customization according to the position of the cursor G83 when the remaining time for customization during play reaches 0 seconds. Specifically, when the cursor G83 is selecting the end selection section G82 when the remaining time for customization during play reaches 0 seconds, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the performance specific items to a completely default state by turning off all flags in the performance specific item storage section 128. On the other hand, when the cursor G83 is selecting the continue selection section G81 when the remaining time for customization during play reaches 0 seconds, the performance control microcomputer 121 maintains all flags in the performance specific item storage section 128 to continue the current customization state for the performance specific items.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(E), when the remaining time for in-game customization reaches 0 seconds while the cursor G83 is selecting the end selection section G82, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns off all flags (premium up mode flag, one-shot notification prohibition flag, auto button flag, 3D prohibition flag, pre-reading prohibition flag) stored in the performance specific item storage section 128, and sets the performance specific items to a completely default state. In this case, when the non-playing custom operation screen G102 is subsequently displayed for the first time, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the non-playing custom operation screen G102 is displayed in a state in which each of the sub-cursors G71c to G75c selects each of the default selection sections G71a to G75a.

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), when the cursor G83 selects the continuation selection section G81 and the remaining customization time during play becomes 0 seconds, the performance control microcontroller 121 maintains the ON/OFF state of all flags stored in the performance specific item memory unit 128 (premium up mode flag, one-shot announcement prohibition flag, auto button flag, 3D prohibition flag, pre-reading prohibition flag) and continues the current customization state for the performance specific items. In this case, when the non-playing custom operation screen G102 is subsequently displayed for the first time, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the non-playing custom operation screen G102 is displayed with the same content as the non-playing custom operation screen G102 that was most recently customized before the in-play custom operation image G80 shown in FIG. 88(C) was displayed (sub-cursors G71c, G73c, G75c select customization selection sections G71b, G73b, G75b, and sub-cursors G72c, G73c select default selection sections G72a, G74a).

As mentioned above, when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 88(C), the effect customization state flag is turned OFF. This OFF effect customization state flag is not turned ON, for example, when the cursor G83 selects the continuation selection section G81 in the in-game custom operation image G80 and the remaining in-game custom time becomes 0 seconds. Therefore, when the customization state is continued as an in-game custom operation, even if the customization state is maintained after that, the game will enter a customer waiting state and the customer waiting demo video G100 will be displayed on the display unit 50a, and when the special chart variable display is started while the customer waiting demo video G100 is being displayed, and the special chart variable display (variable display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3) starts, the in-game custom operation image G80 will not be displayed.

In terms of changing various performance specific items, for example, assume that the performance specific items are in a customized state, the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 87 (A), and then, by non-play custom operation, the sub-cursors G71c to G75c finally select the default selection section G71a to G75a, and the setting selection screen is displayed. In other words, assume that the customized state is changed to the default state by non-play custom operation. In this case, although a change is made to the performance specific items, the performance customization state flag is not turned ON. Therefore, after this, the special chart variable display is performed once, and then the customer waiting state is again entered, and the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, and from that state, the special chart variable display is executed, and even if the display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is changed (special chart variable performance), the in-play custom operation image G80 is not displayed. In other words, there is no opportunity to enable custom operation during play.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of changing various performance specific items, for example, the performance specific items are in a customized state, and the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 87 (A), and then, by non-play custom operation, the sub-cursors G71c to G73c finally select the customization selection section G71b to G73b, and the sub-cursors G74c to G75c select the customization selection section G74b to G75b, and the setting selection screen is displayed. In other words, by non-play custom operation, a certain customization state is changed to another customization state. In this case, the performance customization state flag is turned ON. Therefore, after this, once the special chart variable display is performed, the customer waiting state is again entered, and the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, and from that state, the special chart variable display is executed, and the display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is changed (special chart variable performance), and the in-play custom operation image G80 is displayed, and in-play custom operation becomes possible. Note that the display control when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed thereafter is the same as when the state changes from the default state to the customized state.

In terms of changing each performance specification item, for example, the performance specification items are in the default state, and the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 87 (A), but then the cross button 40k is not operated, or the cross button 40k is operated, but as a result, the sub-cursors G71c, G74c, and G75c ultimately select the customization selection sections G71b, G73b, and G75b, and the sub-cursors G72c and G74c select the default selection sections G72b and G72b, and the setting selection screen is displayed. In other words, the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed once, but the default state has not changed from before the screen was displayed. In this case, the performance customization state flag is turned ON. Therefore, after this, the special chart variable display is performed once, and then the state changes to customer waiting state again, and the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed. From that state, the special chart variable display is executed, and when the display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 (special chart variable effect) is performed, the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, and custom operation during play becomes possible. Note that the display control when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed after this is the same as when the state changes from the default state to the customized state.

Furthermore, from the viewpoint of changing each performance specific item, for example, the performance specific items are in the default state, and the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 85 (A), but then the cross button 40k is not operated, or the cross button 40k is operated, but as a result, the sub-cursor G71c to G75c ultimately selects the default selection section G71a to G75a, and the setting selection screen is displayed. In other words, the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed once, but the default state does not change, just like before the screen is displayed. In this case, although a change is made to the performance specific items, the performance customization state flag is not turned ON. Therefore, after this, the special chart variable display is performed once, and then the customer waiting state is again displayed, and the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, and even if the special chart variable display is executed from that state and the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed (special chart variable performance), the in-game custom operation image G80 is not displayed. In other words, there's no opportunity to customize the game while you're playing.

Note that we will not go into specific details about the performance and control content related to the premier performance, one-shot announcement, auto button, performance using naked-eye 3D stereoscopic vision, and pre-reading chances, but the performance control board 120 appropriately controls the premier performance, one-shot announcement, auto button, performance using naked-eye 3D stereoscopic vision, and pre-reading chances based on the information stored in the performance specific item memory unit 128.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY4, the specifications of the performance specific items (first performance specific item to fifth performance specific item: specific items related to the performance) include a default state (default first specification) and a customized state (second specification different from the first specification). When the specifications of the performance specific items (first performance specific item to fifth performance specific item: specific items related to the performance) are set to the customized state (second specification different from the first specification), a custom operation image G80 during play that asks about continuing the setting of the customized state (second specification different from the first specification) can be displayed on the display unit 50a (a specific display can be executed on the display unit). Therefore, for example, when the player is unaware of the existence of a function to change the performance specific items, it is possible to prevent the player from playing with unintended specifications, thereby suppressing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, in a customer waiting state (non-game state) where no special chart variable display (variable display of identification information) or jackpot game (specific game) is being executed, when a game ball enters the starting hole 11, 12 (predetermined conditions are met) and special chart variable display (variable display of identification information) is being executed, the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed (specific display executed), so that it is possible to make players who have just started playing aware of the function for changing the specific aspects of the performance, further preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, in the customer waiting state (non-play state), the specifications of the performance specific items (specific items related to the performance) can be changed from the default state (first specification) to a customized state (second specification) by operating the cross button 40k or the first performance button 41k (operation means). When the specifications of the performance specific items (specific items related to the performance) are changed from the default state (first specification) to the customized state (second specification) in the customer waiting state (non-play state), in the customer waiting state (non-play state), when the game ball enters the start hole 11, 12 (a predetermined condition is satisfied), the special chart variable display (variable display of identification information) is executed. However, in the next waiting state (non-playing state) that occurs when a game ball enters the starting gates 11, 12 (predetermined conditions are met), the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed (specific display may be executed) in the special chart variable display (variable display of identification information). This makes it possible to prevent the player who has changed the performance specific items to the customized state of their own volition from feeling annoyed by displaying the in-game custom operation image G80, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

(Modification of the fourth embodiment)
Next, modified examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. Note that the modified examples described below can be appropriately combined with each other.

The performance specific items that can be set by the player at will include premium up mode, one shot notification, auto button, 3D, and pre-reading chance, but the specific content of the performance specific items is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, there are five types of performance specific items that can be set by the player at will, but the number of types is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

The non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed by operating the up/down button 40k1 (upper operation section 40ku or lower operation section 40kd) when the setting selection screen is displayed, but the display method of the non-play custom operation screen G102 is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the non-play custom operation screen G102 may be displayed when the first effect button 41k or the second effect button 42k is operated when the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed. Alternatively, the non-play custom operation screen G102 may be displayed when the first effect button 41k or the second effect button 42k is operated in a customer waiting state when the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a form indicating a miss are displayed in a stopped state superimposed on the background image displayed in a normal variation such as the first normal background image G111 on the display unit 50a in a customer waiting state.

In addition, when the first effect button 41k is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, the setting selection screen is displayed, but the display method of the non-play custom operation screen G102 may be changed as appropriate without being particularly limited. For example, in the customer waiting state, when the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, the setting selection screen is not switched to even if the cross button 40k, the first effect button 41k, or the second effect button 42k is operated, but the performance time of the customer waiting demo video G100 is set, and when the customer waiting demo video G100 ends, the setting selection screen may be switched to. In this case, the continuous display time of the setting selection screen is set, and unless the up/down button 40k1 or the left/right button 40k2 is operated, when the continuous display time has elapsed since the setting selection screen was displayed, the setting selection screen is switched to the customer waiting demo video G100 again, and thereafter, unless the up/down button 40k1 or the left/right button 40k2 is operated on the setting selection screen, the customer waiting demo video G100 and the setting selection screen may be repeatedly displayed alternately.

The display contents and layout of the non-play custom operation screen G102 may be changed as appropriate to the extent that the player can set the state (default state/customized state) related to various performance specific items by operation when the screen G102 is displayed. For example, the operation method for moving the main cursor G76 (method for selecting a performance specific item) and the operation method for moving each of the sub-cursors G71c to G75c (method for selecting a state related to various performance specific items) may be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the first effect button 41k is operated on the non-play custom operation screen G102 while the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of the end section G78, the screen switches to a setting selection screen, and the state of various effect specific items based on the position of the sub-cursors G71c to G75c at that time (the state of the sub-cursors G71c to G75c overlapping with either the default selection section G71a to G75a or the customization selection section G71b to G75b) is determined, but the operation method for this determination may also be changed as appropriate. For example, when the first effect button 41k is operated while the main cursor G76 is positioned to the left of any of the effect specific items G71 to G75, the screen switches to a setting selection screen, and the state of various effect specific items based on the position of the sub-cursors G71c to G75c at that time is determined.

When the special chart variable display is started while the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the state related to the various performance specific items is determined based on the position of the sub-cursors G71c to G75c at that time. In this case, even if the state related to any of the performance specific items has changed since the non-play custom operation screen G102 was displayed, the change may not be recognized and the state related to the performance specific items when the non-play custom operation screen G102 was displayed may be maintained.

The time during which the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, in other words, the effective time related to the in-game custom operation, is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, the display content and layout of the in-game custom operation image G80 may be changed as appropriate to the extent that the player can arbitrarily set the continuation and end of the customized state by operation when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. For example, the operation method for moving the cursor G83 (the method for selecting the continuation and end of the customized state) may be changed as appropriate, such as moving the cursor G83 to the non-selected side each time the first effect button 41k is operated.

In addition, when the custom operation image G80 is displayed during gameplay, the cursor G83 is displayed overlapping the end selection section G82, in other words, the end of the customization state is selected, but the cursor G83 may be displayed overlapping the continue selection section G81, in other words, the continuation of the customization state is selected.

When the continuation of the customized state is selected in the in-game custom operation, the game then enters a customer waiting state, and when the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed in the customer waiting state, the special chart variable display is started and a special chart change performance is executed, the in-game custom operation image G80 is not displayed in the special chart change performance, but the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed. In this case, as long as the customization state continues, the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed every time in the first special chart change performance executed from the customer waiting demo video G100, or a restriction may be set on the display of the in-game custom operation image G80 even if the customization state continues, such as up to the first predetermined number of times or up to a specific period thereafter.

After entering the customized state by operating the non-play custom operation screen G102 (non-play custom operation), the special chart variable display is performed once, then the game enters customer waiting state again and customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, and if the first special chart variable display is executed from that state and the first variable display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 (special chart variable display) is executed, the in-play custom operation image G80 is displayed, but it may also be configured to display the in-play custom operation image G80 when the setting selection screen is displayed again in the customer waiting state and the first special chart variable display is executed from that state and the first variable display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 (special chart variable display) is executed.

When a customization state is changed from one to another by an operation on the non-play custom operation screen G102 (non-play custom operation), the in-play custom operation image G80 is displayed in a specific special chart change performance thereafter, but in this case, the in-play custom operation image G80 may not be displayed.

Even if the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed in a certain customization state, but the customization state is not changed and the non-play custom operation screen G102 is closed, the in-play custom operation image G80 is displayed in a specific special chart change performance thereafter, but in this case, the in-play custom operation image G80 may not be displayed.

In the completely default state, the non-play custom operation screen G102 is displayed, and if at least one of the performance specific items is customized by an operation on the non-play custom operation screen G102 (non-play custom operation), the in-play custom operation image G80 is displayed in the subsequent specific special chart change performance. However, for example, there are two types of performance specific items: specific performance specific items and non-specific performance specific items, and the condition for displaying the in-play custom operation image G80 is that at least the specific performance specific items are in a customized state, and even if only the non-specific performance specific items are in a customized state, the in-play custom operation image G80 may not be displayed. As a distinction between the specific performance specific items and the non-specific performance specific items here, for example, performance specific items that can be set by other than non-play custom operations may be non-specific performance specific items, and performance specific items that can be set only by non-play custom operations may be specific performance specific items.

When the in-game custom operation image G80 disappears while the end of the customization state is selected (when the in-game custom operation ends), the presentation control microcomputer 121 turns OFF the flags related to all presentation specific items at that time, but the timing of this turning OFF, in other words the timing of transitioning the presentation specific items to a completely default state, is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the presentation control microcomputer 121 may turn OFF the flags related to all presentation specific items when the special chart change presentation being performed while the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed ends, or when the next special chart change presentation starts.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the fifth embodiment will be mainly described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Also, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as the basic embodiment or the similar corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment is configured as a so-called "one-type two-type mixed machine." In one pachinko game machine PY5, a specification called "first type (so-called "digital pachinko type")" is mixed, in which a special drawing 1 lottery is held when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11, and when a big win is won, a big win game is executed in which a first big winning hole 14 described later is opened, and a specification called "second type (so-called "wing mono type")" is mixed, in which a special drawing 2 lottery is held when a game ball enters the second starting hole 12, and when a small win is won, a small win game is executed in which a second big winning hole 15 described later is opened, and when a game ball that enters the second big winning hole 15 opened in the small win game passes through a specific area 16 (so-called "V zone") described later (so-called "V winning"), a big win game is executed.

Here, a front view of the game board unit YU of the pachinko game machine PY5 is shown in FIG. 92. As shown in FIG. 92, the game area 6 is provided with a first large prize device 14D and a second large prize device 15D that can be reversibly changed between a state in which the game ball cannot win and a state in which the game ball can win. The first large prize device 14D corresponds to the large prize device 14D of the basic embodiment. Therefore, the first large prize device 14D is formed with a first large prize opening 14 that can be changed between a closed state in which the game ball cannot win and an open state in which the game ball can win, and the first large prize opening 14 takes the closed state and the open state by the first AT opening and closing member 14k that the first large prize device 14D has. In addition, the first large prize device 14D is provided with a first large prize opening sensor 14a that detects that the game ball has entered (won) the first large prize opening 14.

The second large prize winning device 15D is provided directly below the downstream area of the first large prize winning device 14D, and is partially configured in the same manner as the first large prize winning device 14D. The second large prize winning device 15D is formed with a second large prize winning opening 15 that can be changed between a closed state where the game ball cannot enter and an open state where the game ball can enter, and the second large prize winning opening 15 is switched between the closed state and the open state by a second AT opening/closing member 15k provided on the second large prize winning device 15D. The second large prize winning device 15D is also provided with a second large prize winning opening sensor 15a that detects when the game ball enters the second large prize winning opening 15 (wins).

In the fifth embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out when a ball enters the first large prize opening 14. Also, 15 prize balls are paid out when a ball enters the second large prize opening 15.

Next, the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball has entered the second large prize opening 15 will be described. Figure 93 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic representation of the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball has entered the second large prize opening 15. As shown in Figure 91, the configuration after the game ball has entered the second large prize opening 15 includes a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 through which the game ball that entered the second large prize opening 15 can pass. In addition, a distribution member 16k is provided that can distribute the game ball that entered the second large prize opening 15 between the specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17.

The distribution member 16k is configured to be movable forward and backward by a distribution solenoid 16s (see FIG. 94). The distribution solenoid 16s is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and the game control microcomputer 101 can control the distribution solenoid 16s during the small win game described below.

The game control microcomputer 101 can move the distribution member 16k forward and backward using the distribution solenoid 16s to set the distribution member 16k in either a first passing state in which a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16, or a second passing state in which a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 15 can pass through the non-specific area 17. The distribution member 16k is normally held in the advanced position so that it is in the second passing state, and when a small winning game is played, it retreats to the retreat position for a predetermined time (e.g., 2.8 seconds) and changes to the first passing state. The operation of the distribution member 16k in a small winning game will be described in detail later.

The pachinko game machine PY5 is also provided with a specific area sensor 16a (see FIG. 91) that detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 16 but does not detect game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 17. The specific area sensor 16a is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and when it detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the game control board 100 indicating that it has detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16.

In addition, a transparent window (not shown) made of synthetic resin is provided in front of the specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17, allowing the player to visually see whether the game ball that entered the second large winning hole 15 passed through the specific area 16 or the non-specific area 17.

Next, the electrical configuration of the gaming control board 100 side of the pachinko gaming machine PY5 will be described. Figure 94 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming control board 100 side of the pachinko gaming machine PY5. As shown in Figure 94, the various actuators connected to the gaming control board 100 include a first AT solenoid 14s, a second AT solenoid 15s, and a distribution solenoid 16s.

The game control board 100 can output signals to the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s to control the driving of the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s, respectively. The first AT solenoid 14s is connected to the first AT opening and closing member 14k, and the first AT solenoid 14s is driven to cause the first AT opening and closing member 14k to open and close. The second AT solenoid 15s is connected to the second AT opening and closing member 15k, and the second AT solenoid 15s is driven to cause the second AT opening and closing member 15k to open and close. The distribution solenoid 16s is connected to the distribution member 16k, and the distribution solenoid 16s is driven to cause the distribution member 16k to move forward and backward relative to the front of the game board 1.

In addition, various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a first large prize opening sensor 14a, a second large prize opening sensor 15a, and a specific area sensor 16a, which are connected so as to be able to output signals to the game control board 100. The first large prize opening sensor 14a can detect a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 14, and upon detecting a game ball, outputs a signal to the game control board 100 indicating that the game ball has entered the first large prize opening 14. The second large prize opening sensor 15a can detect a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15, and upon detecting a game ball, outputs a signal to the game control board 100 indicating that the game ball has entered the second large prize opening 15. The specific area sensor 16a can detect a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16, and when it detects a game ball, it outputs a signal to the game control board 100 indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning).

Next, the electrical configuration of the performance control board 120 in the fifth embodiment will be described. Figure 95 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control board 120 in the fifth embodiment.

The microcomputer 121 for controlling the performance of the pachinko game machine PY5, which will be described in detail later, measures the time that has elapsed since the first time-saving state (the consecutive winning time) occurred in the so-called "consecutive winnings" that occurs when the special chart display shows a jackpot in the normal game state, and the time-saving state occurs until the next time the special chart display shows a loss in the time-saving state and the normal game state is resumed. The RAM 124 for performance is provided with a timer (consecutive winning time timer) 128 for measuring the consecutive winning time. The consecutive winning time timer 128 is initially set to "0". When the microcomputer 121 for controlling the performance starts measuring the consecutive winning time, it performs a timer update process (S4104) to appropriately update the consecutive winning time timer 128 according to the elapsed time. That is, the consecutive winning time timer 128 is counted up by 1 msec each time the timer update process is performed.

The connection between the payout control board 170 and the performance control board 120 is a one-way communication connection that can only transmit signals from the payout control board 170 to the performance control board 120. That is, a one-way circuit (e.g., a circuit using a diode) not shown is interposed between the payout control board 170 and the performance control board 120 as a communication direction control means. In the fifth embodiment, the payout control board 170 outputs the signal (contact detection signal) output from the touch switch 72a to the performance control board 120 as is. When the player is in contact with the handle 72k, the contact detection signal is output (ON state), and when the player is not in contact with the handle 72k, the contact detection signal is not output (OFF state). Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 can detect whether the player is in contact with the handle 72k or not. Furthermore, if the player is not touching the handle 72k, this means that the game ball launch operation is not being performed, or in other words, that the launch of the game ball has stopped, so the performance control microcomputer 121 is also capable of detecting that the game ball launch operation is not being performed and that the launch of the game ball has stopped.

Next, the game states that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY5 will be explained. In the pachinko game machine PY5, only one type of game state, the normal probability state, is set as the game state related to the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot judgment. On the other hand, as in the basic embodiment, a non-time-saving state (low base state) and a time-saving state (high base state) are set as game states related to the ease of winning at the second starting port 12. Therefore, in the following, the low-probability, low-base game state will be referred to as the "normal game state", and the low-probability, high-base game state will be simply referred to as the "time-saving state".

The pachinko game machine PY5 is configured so that in the normal game state, it is easier to continuously fire the game ball with a right hit to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 12 and have it enter the second starting hole 12 in the time-saving state than to continuously fire the game ball with a left hit to aim for the ball to enter the first starting hole 11 and have it enter the first starting hole 11. Furthermore, in the normal game state, it is configured so that it is easier to continuously fire the game ball with a left hit to aim for the ball to enter the first starting hole 11 and have it enter the first starting hole 11 than to continuously fire the game ball with a right hit to aim for the ball to enter the second starting hole 12 and have it enter the second starting hole 12.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, if the first starting hole 11 is won, a maximum of four special chart 1 reservations can be generated as in the basic embodiment, but if the second starting hole 12 is won, no special chart 2 reservations can be generated. In other words, the upper limit of the number of special chart 1 reservations is four, and the upper limit of the number of special chart 2 reservations is "0."

Next, the jackpot determination according to the fifth embodiment will be described. An example of the configuration of the jackpot determination table referenced in the jackpot determination according to the fifth embodiment is shown in FIG. 96(A). As shown in FIG. 96(A), the jackpot determination tables include a jackpot determination table (first jackpot determination table) related to special chart 1 used in the jackpot determination based on winning the first starting port 11 (first jackpot determination), and a jackpot determination table (second jackpot determination table) related to special chart 2 used in the jackpot determination based on winning the second starting port 12 (second jackpot determination).

According to the first jackpot determination table, the first jackpot determination determines a jackpot or a miss. On the other hand, according to the second jackpot determination table, the second jackpot determination determines a small jackpot or a miss. As described below, when a small jackpot is determined in the second jackpot determination, a stop display of the special chart 2 in a manner that ultimately indicates a small jackpot is executed in the special chart 2 variable display (a predetermined result of "small jackpot" is derived), and a small jackpot game is executed according to the stop display. Then, when the game ball that entered the second large prize opening 15 in the small jackpot game passes through the specific area 16, a jackpot game is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 96(A), in the first jackpot determination, the probability of being determined as a jackpot is set to 1/319. On the other hand, in the second jackpot determination, the probability of being determined as a small jackpot is set to 266/319 (≈1/1.2). As in the basic embodiment, in each jackpot determination table, the determination values of the special pattern random numbers (special pattern random number determination values) are appropriately allocated to the jackpot, small jackpot, and miss results of the jackpot determination so that they have the selection rates shown in FIG. 96(A). However, the selection rates of the jackpot and small jackpot are not particularly limited and can be changed appropriately. Also, in the first jackpot determination, a small jackpot may be included as a jackpot determination result. Alternatively, in the second jackpot determination, a jackpot may be included as a jackpot determination result.

Next, the jackpot symbol and the small jackpot symbol according to the fifth embodiment will be described. As mentioned above, the jackpot symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of jackpot as well as the winning of the jackpot. The jackpot symbol is determined by the jackpot symbol type determination, which is performed using a jackpot symbol type determination table. Figure 96 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(B), there are two types of jackpot patterns for special chart 1: jackpot pattern A and jackpot pattern B. According to the jackpot pattern type determination table for special chart 1, jackpot pattern A is selected with a 50% probability, and jackpot pattern B is selected with a 50% probability.

The small win symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of small win as well as the winning of the small win. In the special symbol variable display when a small win is won, the small win symbol is displayed as a stop to derive the result of the big win determination. The small win symbol is determined by the small win symbol type determination, and the small win symbol type determination is performed using a small win symbol type determination table. Figure 96 (C) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the small win symbol type determination table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(C), one type of small win pattern, small win pattern A, is provided as the small win pattern for special chart 2. According to the small win pattern type determination table for special chart 2, small win pattern A is selected with a 100% probability.

In the fifth embodiment, the special symbol 2 related judgment information includes the special symbol random number, the big win symbol type random number, the reach random number, and the special symbol change pattern random number, as well as the small win symbol type random number for determining the small win symbol type. Therefore, a small win symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS) related to the small win symbol type random number is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. The small win symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS) is updated in the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) in the same way as the special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T) and the big win symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS). Then, in step S211, the gaming control microcomputer 101 also acquires the small win symbol type random number as the special symbol 2 related judgment information, and stores it in the special symbol related judgment information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104. The range of the small win symbol type random number can be set as appropriate, but in the fifth embodiment it is set to "0 to 255."

In addition, in the small win symbol type determination table, the determination value of the small win symbol type random number (small win symbol type random number determination value) is appropriately assigned to the small win symbol type that is the result of the small win symbol type determination so that it becomes the selection rate shown in FIG. 96 (C). Therefore, as described later, the pachinko game machine PY5 compares the acquired small win symbol type random number with the small win symbol type determination table to determine the type of the small win symbol.

The number of big win symbol types and the number of small win symbol types related to Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, as well as the selection rate of each big win symbol type and the selection rate of each small win symbol type, are not limited to the fifth embodiment and may be set as appropriate.

Next, the jackpot game according to the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the game ball that entered the second large prize opening 15 opened in the small prize game executed after the small prize symbol is stopped and displayed passes through the specific area 16 (V entry). The jackpot game components that make up the jackpot game, in other words, the jackpot game control table for controlling the jackpot game, are associated with the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed, more specifically, the type of jackpot symbol that triggers the execution of the jackpot game, and the type of small prize symbol. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the jackpot game control table according to the fifth embodiment.

Note that even if a small win symbol is displayed, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 during the small win game, the big win game will not be executed. Therefore, the direct trigger for executing the big win game when a small win symbol is displayed is the game ball passing through the specific area 16 (V entry), but the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 16 unless it enters the second large winning opening 15, and entry into the second large winning opening 15 can be achieved by opening the second large winning opening 15, and the opening of the second large winning opening 15 is executed during the small win game, so the display of the small win symbol is also included in the trigger for executing the big win game.

Furthermore, in the following, winning a small win in a big win judgment and the small win symbol stopping to be displayed are referred to as "a small win/having a small win/becoming a small win", and winning a big win in a big win judgment, the big win symbol stopping to be displayed, and the game ball passing through the specific area 16 are also referred to as "a big win/having a big win/becoming a big win". Note that, as described below, in the fifth embodiment, when a small win game is executed, as long as the game ball continues to be shot normally, the game ball will pass through the specific area 16 (V winning), so the small win can essentially be considered a big win.

As shown in FIG. 97, the number of rounds of play for the jackpot game associated with jackpot pattern A (hereinafter also referred to as the "first jackpot game") and the jackpot game associated with jackpot pattern B (hereinafter also referred to as the "second jackpot game") is 10.

The number of rounds of play for the jackpot game associated with the small jackpot pattern A (hereinafter also referred to as the "third jackpot game") is 10. The third jackpot game is played in response to the end of the small jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the "first small jackpot game") that is played when the game ball passes through the specific area 16.

In the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game components also include the type of jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 97, the first jackpot opening 14 is set to open in all rounds of all jackpot games, regardless of the special symbol type. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 97, the number of times the first jackpot opening 14 is opened in a round is set to one, the time for each opening (opening time) is set to 29.5 seconds, and the time for closing after opening (closing time) is set to 2.0 seconds, for all rounds of all jackpot games, regardless of the special symbol type. Note that the closing time is not set for the last round of each jackpot game. This is because, following the end of the opening of the first jackpot opening 14 in the last round, an ending is performed in which the first jackpot opening 14 remains closed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of the type of special symbol, the opening time for all jackpot games ("OP time" in FIG. 97) is set to 10.0 seconds, and the ending time for all jackpot games ("ED time" in FIG. 97) is set to 10.0 seconds.

The specific values related to the big win game components are not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the opening time and ending time may be different values depending on the game state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, the type of the big win openings 14, 15 to be opened may be different depending on the order of the round play. Furthermore, the number of times the big win openings 14, 15 are opened, the total time the big win openings 14, 15 are open in that round play, and the time (closing time) for closing the big win openings 14, 15 after they are opened may be different depending on the order of the round play. Also, the number of times round play is performed in that big win game and the total time the big win openings 14, 15 can be opened may be different depending on the type of the small win symbol.

Next, the small win game according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine PY5 uses a small win game control table to control the opening and closing of the large prize openings 14 and 15 during the small win game. In the fifth embodiment, the small win game control table can be set in association with the type of small win symbol.

The small win game control table stores elements (small win game components) that make up a small win game, particularly with regard to the opening and closing of the large winning openings 14 and 15. The small win game components include the type of large winning opening to be opened, the number of times the large winning opening is opened in the small win game, the opening time (opening pattern) for each opening, the time to close until the next opening (closing time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). In other words, the small win game components are associated with the small win symbol type. Figure 98 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the small win game control table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 98, in a small win game, the second large prize opening 15 is opened once. The opening time of the second large prize opening 15 in a small win game is 1.8 seconds. The opening time of the small win game is 2.0 seconds, and the ending time is 2.0 seconds.

Here, the details of the small win game will be explained using FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a time chart showing the flow of the small win game. As shown in FIG. 99, when the "small win pattern (small win pattern A)" is displayed as the stop display of the special chart 2, the small win game is played. Then, in response to the start of the small win game, an opening (small win OP) is first performed in which the second large winning opening 15 is kept closed. This small win OP continues until 2.0 seconds have passed since the start of the small win game, and when the small win OP ends, the second large winning opening 15 opens (small win opening is performed), and the distribution member 16k is withdrawn to enter the first passing state. This small win opening continues until 1.8 seconds have passed since the start of the opening, or until 10 game balls enter the second large winning opening 15, while the withdrawal of the distribution member 16k continues until 2.8 seconds have passed since the start of the withdrawal. Then, when the small win opening is completed, the second large prize opening 15 is closed and the ending (small win ED) is performed in which the closed state is maintained. This small win ED continues until 2.0 seconds have elapsed after the start of the ED, and the end of the small win ED marks the end of the small win game.

When a game ball enters the second large prize opening 15 during a small prize game, in the first passing state, the distribution member 16k is in the retracted position, so the game ball passes through the specific area 16 without flowing down to the non-specific area 17, whereas in the second passing state, the distribution member 16k is in the advanced position, so the game ball flows down over the distribution member 16k and passes through the non-specific area 17. When the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a large prize game according to the type of small prize symbol is played depending on the end of the small prize game.

As mentioned above, when a big win game corresponding to a small win symbol type is started, an opening in which the first big win opening 14 is kept closed is first performed for 10.0 seconds, and when this opening ends, the first round of play begins and the first big win opening 14 opens.

In addition, during the small win game, while the second large winning opening 15 is open, and further, until 1.0 second has elapsed since the second large winning opening 15 is closed, the distribution member 16k is retracted (the first passing state is maintained), and the game ball can pass through the specific area 16 (V winning). The pachinko game machine PY5 is configured so that, when the game ball is started to be shot by hitting with the right hand after the small win game is started, and then the game ball is continued to be shot by hitting with the right hand in the small win game, the game ball can basically pass through the specific area 16 (V winning) (unless there is a particular problem). In addition, when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 15 (wins) during the small win game, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls, regardless of whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 or not.

Next, the game state to which the pachinko game machine PY5 newly transitions upon the end of a jackpot game and the termination conditions for each game state will be described. In the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the stopped display of a jackpot pattern, the game state to which the game transitions upon the end of the jackpot game and the termination conditions for each game state are associated with the type of the special pattern. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed based on the game ball passing through a specific area 16 (V winning), the game state to which the game transitions upon the end of the jackpot game and the termination conditions for each game state are associated with the type of the special pattern.

Figure 100 shows an example of the configuration of a game state setting table that indicates the relationship between the type of special symbol (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game, the game state to which the game transitions upon the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type, and the end conditions related to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 100, when the type of the special symbol is the jackpot symbol A or the small jackpot symbol A, the time-saving state (low probability high base game state) is entered upon the end of the jackpot game (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type. An end condition is set for this time-saving state. In the case of the jackpot symbol A or the small jackpot symbol A, the special symbol 2 variable display is executed once. Therefore, the time-saving state entered upon the end of the jackpot game executed after the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, and the time-saving state entered upon the end of the jackpot game executed after the game ball that entered the second large winning hole 15 passes through the specific area 16 in the small jackpot game executed after the small jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed can continue until the special symbol 2 variable display is executed once without the jackpot game being executed. In other words, the specified number of times the time-saving state is entered upon the end of a jackpot game, which is executed by the stopped display of the jackpot pattern A (specified number of time-saving times), and the specified number of times the time-saving state is entered upon the end of a jackpot game, which is executed by the passing of a game ball that has won in the second large prize opening 15 through a specific area 16 in a small jackpot game, which is executed by the stopped display of the small jackpot pattern A (specified number of time-saving times), are once.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when the special symbol 2 variable display for a miss is executed once in the time-saving state for the big win symbol A and the small win symbol A, the state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal game state upon the end of the special symbol 2 variable display. However, as mentioned above, the probability of a small win being determined in the second big win determination is 1/1.2, so it is expected that the cycle of a small win symbol being displayed in the special symbol 2 variable display in the time-saving state, a V being won from there and a third big win game being executed, and then transitioning to the time-saving state upon the end of the third big win game, will be repeated to a certain degree continuously. In other words, it is expected that the consecutive wins will be able to continue to a certain degree.

In addition, if the special symbol type is jackpot symbol B, the game will transition to a normal game state (low probability low base game state) upon the end of the jackpot game (second jackpot game) corresponding to that special symbol type. No end condition is set for this normal game state.

Next, the special chart 2 variation pattern related to the time-saving state in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment, the special chart 2 variation pattern determination table for determining the special chart 2 variation pattern in the time-saving state is different from the special chart 2 variation pattern determination table for determining the special chart 2 variation pattern in the time-saving state described in the basic embodiment. An example of the configuration of the special chart 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special chart 2 variation pattern determination table) related to the time-saving state in the fifth embodiment is shown in FIG. 101. As shown in FIG. 101, the time-saving special chart 2 variation pattern determination table includes a time-saving special chart 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the jackpot determination result "small win" and a time-saving special chart 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the jackpot determination result "miss".

In the case of a small win, there is a 90% chance that the THP will be 81, and a 10% chance that the THP will be 82. In the case of a loss, there is a 100% chance that the THP will be 83.

Here, we will explain the flow of special chart change presentation (presentation flow) based on each special chart change pattern.

In a special chart change performance based on THP81, a special performance is executed immediately after the start of the special chart change performance, and the special performance ends the special chart change performance.

In the special chart change performance based on THP82, a special performance is executed immediately after the start of the special chart change performance, followed by a consecutive win result performance, after which a revival performance is executed, and the special chart change performance ends with the revival performance.

In the special chart change performance based on THP83, a special performance is executed immediately after the start of the special chart change performance, followed by a consecutive win result performance, which ends the special chart change performance.

In the fifth embodiment, the various special chart change patterns (THP81 to THP83) are given names shown in the second item from the right, "Name of special chart change pattern," in the configuration example of the special chart change pattern determination table in FIG. 101. For example, the special chart change pattern "THP81" of a small win in which the special chart change effect ends with a special effect is called a "special normal small win change," the special chart change pattern "THP82" of a small win in which the special chart change effect ends with a revival effect is called a "special revival small win change," and the losing special chart change pattern "THP83" in which the special chart change effect ends with a consecutive win result effect is called a "special losing change."

As mentioned above, in the fifth embodiment, the time-saving feature is set to one time, so if the first special chart 2 variable display during the time-saving feature is a miss, the time-saving feature ends and the game transitions to the normal game mode. The special effects are intended to tease the player whether they will get a small win (essentially a big win) or a miss, and also to tease the player whether they will get a small win and ultimately transition to the time-saving feature, allowing them to continue the game mode (a winning streak) that is favorable to the player, or whether they will end up in the normal game mode, which is unfavorable to the player.

In special effects, a background image dedicated to special effects is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, similar to SP Reach and L Reach. The specific display content of the background image dedicated to special effects can be set as appropriate, but in the fifth embodiment, the background image dedicated to special effects is composed of 3DCG video. A predetermined story is associated with the video that constitutes the background image dedicated to special effects. In the video related to the background image dedicated to special effects, as the predetermined story progresses, a branching point (the so-called "win/lose branching point") is reached in the final stage where a branching point is reached where a branching point is either executed to execute a presentation suggesting a small win (effectively a big win) (a big win suggestion presentation) or an execution to suggest a loss (a loss suggestion presentation).

In the special chart change presentation based on THP81, after the winning/losing branch point, a jackpot suggestion presentation dedicated to special presentations is executed, and then the display of the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a jackpot is performed. On the other hand, in the special chart change presentation based on THP83, after the winning/losing branch point, a loss suggestion presentation dedicated to special presentations is executed, followed by a consecutive win result presentation suggesting the end of the consecutive win, and then the display returns to the normal presentation mode, and the display of the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a loss is performed.

Note that although the positioning can be set appropriately, the jackpot suggestion effect in the special chart change effect related to THP81 is considered to be included in the special effects, and the miss suggestion effect in the special chart change effect related to THP83 is considered to be included in the special effects.

In addition, in the special chart change presentation based on THP82, just like in the special miss change, special presentations (including miss indication presentations) and consecutive win result presentations are executed, and then the display returns to the normal presentation mode, with the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stopped to indicate a miss, but then a revival presentation is performed to notify the player that it was actually a small win, and the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3 stopped to indicate a big win.

The presentation time of the presentation flow configuration presentation of the special chart change presentation based on the special chart 2 change pattern related to the time-saving state can be set appropriately, but in the fifth embodiment, the time from the start of the special presentation to the winning/losing branch point is set to 7 seconds. Also, the presentation time of the jackpot suggestion presentation is set to 13 seconds, the presentation time of the miss suggestion presentation is set to 3 seconds, the presentation time of the consecutive win result presentation is set to 5 seconds, the presentation time of the revival presentation is set to 18 seconds, and the time from the consecutive win result presentation to the revival presentation is set to 2 seconds.

Now, the consecutive win result presentation will be explained. Although the consecutive win result presentation may be executed by a special revival jackpot fluctuation, it is basically a presentation that suggests that the consecutive win will end. In the consecutive win result presentation, the total number of jackpots in the consecutive win including the jackpot immediately before the jackpot started (number of jackpots in the consecutive win), the total number of game balls won by winning the first big prize slot 14 in the jackpot game immediately before the jackpot started (first jackpot game) and the jackpot game in the consecutive win (third jackpot game) (number of game balls won in the consecutive win), and the elapsed time of the consecutive win immediately before the consecutive win result presentation ends are displayed.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, the performance control microcomputer 121 is configured to be able to appropriately measure the number of jackpots during a streak and the number of game balls acquired during a streak, in addition to the elapsed time of the streak. When the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the special chart change performance start command related to the special miss variation or the special chart change performance start command related to the special revival jackpot variation in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124, it also sets a command indicating the number of jackpots during the streak (number of jackpots during a streak command) and a command indicating the number of game balls acquired during the streak (number of game balls acquired during a streak command) in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 is capable of appropriately measuring the timing at which the streak result performance starts, and at that timing, sets a command indicating the elapsed time of the streak at that time (streak result performance elapsed time command) in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

Then, when the special chart change presentation start command related to the special miss variation or the special chart change presentation start command related to the special revival jackpot variation set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads out an image for the consecutive win result presentation (consecutive win result presentation image) G91 from the image ROM 142 when 10 seconds (7 seconds until the win/lose turning point + 3 seconds for the miss suggestion presentation) have elapsed since starting the special chart change presentation related to the special miss variation or special revival jackpot variation on the display unit 50a, and displays it large around the center of the display unit 50a. Here, the image CPU 141 displays the number of jackpots during the consecutive wins, the number of game balls acquired during the consecutive wins, and the elapsed time of the consecutive wins just before the consecutive win result presentation ends in the consecutive win result presentation image G91 based on the received command for the number of jackpots during the consecutive wins, the command for the number of game balls acquired during the consecutive wins, and the command for the elapsed time of the consecutive win result presentation.

In the fifth embodiment, the duration of the consecutive winnings result presentation is set to 5 seconds. Therefore, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the consecutive winnings result presentation started, the image CPU 141 erases the consecutive winnings result presentation image G91 to end the consecutive winnings result presentation, and displays the first normal background image G111 and the presentation symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss on the display unit 50a. Here, in the case of a special loss variation, the image CPU 141 completely (definitely) stops and displays the presentation symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped and displayed when 5 seconds have elapsed since the consecutive winnings result presentation ended, while in the case of a special revival big win variation, when 2 seconds have elapsed since the consecutive winnings result presentation ended, the revival presentation that notifies the display unit 50a that it was actually a small win as shown in FIG. 29 (C) is started, and finally, the presentation symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big win at the timing when the special chart 2 stop display is performed.

Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine PY5, apart from the presentation flow configuration presentations such as the special presentation, consecutive win result presentation, and revival presentation, it is possible to execute a time presentation that continuously displays the time that has elapsed since the transition to a time-saving state (specific time-saving state) following a jackpot game (first jackpot game) that was executed as a jackpot with a special chart variable display in the normal game state, in other words, the time that has elapsed since the jackpot game began.

The time effect can be executed during a series of consecutive wins, and can be regarded as an effect that displays the elapsed time of the series in real time. The elapsed time of the series corresponds to the "elapsed time of consecutive wins" that is measured by the elapsed time timer 128 mentioned above. However, as described below, during a series of wins, the effect control microcomputer 121 may interrupt the measurement of the elapsed time of consecutive wins by the elapsed time timer 128. Therefore, the time displayed by the time effect may not accurately display the actual elapsed time of the series.

In the fifth embodiment, the time presentation starts at the timing of transition to a specific time-saving state. For example, when the ending of the first big win game ends, the presentation control microcomputer 121 starts measuring the consecutive winning time elapsed by the consecutive winning time timer 128 and sets a command (time presentation start command) indicating the start of the time presentation in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124. When the time presentation start command set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads an image for time presentation (time presentation image) G90 from the image ROM 142 and displays it around the lower left corner of the display unit 50a to start the time presentation. The time presentation image G90 represents an 8-digit (00:00:00:00) stopwatch that can measure seconds, minutes, and hours to the second decimal place by counting up. After starting the time presentation, the image CPU 141 appropriately updates the time displayed by the time presentation image G90 as time passes.

The time presentation ends when the special chart variable display related to the special miss variation ends and the normal game state is entered. In detail, the time presentation ends immediately before the consecutive win result presentation is performed in the special chart variation presentation based on the special miss variation. When the image CPU 141 receives the consecutive win elapsed time command during the consecutive win result presentation described above, it erases (hides) the time presentation image G90 and then displays the consecutive win result presentation image G91. When the presentation control microcomputer 121 sets the consecutive win elapsed time command during the consecutive win result presentation in the special chart variation presentation based on the special miss variation, it resets the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128 to end the measurement of the consecutive win elapsed time.

Next, we will explain the interruption of the time presentation. There are three types of interruption of the time presentation: interruption of the time presentation by the first interruption mode, interruption of the time presentation by the second interruption mode, and interruption of the time presentation by the third interruption mode. The events that cause the interruption are different in the first interruption mode, the second interruption mode, and the third interruption mode. However, as for the presentation mode related to the interruption, the first interruption mode is a presentation content in which the time presentation image G90 is displayed but the update of the elapsed time of consecutive wins represented by the time presentation image G90 stops, and the second interruption mode and the third interruption mode are a presentation content in which the time presentation image G90 is temporarily hidden.

First, the interruption of the time presentation due to the first interruption mode will be described. The interruption of the time presentation due to the first interruption mode is caused by the special jackpot presentation. The special jackpot presentation is a presentation that notifies the player of a jackpot win, and is executed in the time presentation image G90. Specifically, when the consecutive winning time is being updated in the time presentation image G90, the timer shown in the time presentation image G90 becomes "00:00:00:00" as if it had broken down. In the fifth embodiment, the special jackpot presentation starts when one second has passed since the special chart variation presentation related to the special normal jackpot variation started.

The performance time of the special big win effect is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, the time performance interrupted by the first interruption mode resumes when 10 seconds have passed since the interruption began. The time performance interrupted by the first interruption mode resumes so that the interrupted time is corrected. In other words, the consecutive winning streak elapsed time represented by the time performance (time performance image G90) when interrupted by the first interruption mode is different from the consecutive winning streak elapsed time represented by the time performance (time performance image G90) when resumed. In detail, the value obtained by subtracting the consecutive winning streak elapsed time represented by the time performance (time performance image G90) when interrupted by the first interruption mode from the consecutive winning streak elapsed time represented by the time performance (time performance image G90) when resumed is the interrupted time.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the special chart variation pattern related to the special normal jackpot variation, it performs a jackpot special performance execution judgment to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot special performance. The jackpot special performance execution judgment is performed, for example, using a jackpot special performance execution judgment table stored in the performance ROM 123. The jackpot special performance execution judgment table is configured to determine that a jackpot special performance is executed with a 10% probability. Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that a jackpot special performance is executed in the jackpot special performance execution judgment, it sets a command indicating the start of a jackpot special performance (jackpot special performance start command) in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 together with a special chart variation performance start command related to the special normal jackpot variation.

When the special chart change presentation start command for the special normal jackpot variation and the jackpot special presentation start command set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124 are sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image control CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the jackpot special presentation by changing the consecutive winning streak elapsed time represented by the time presentation image G90 to "00:00:00:00" when one second has elapsed since the special chart change presentation for the special normal jackpot variation was started on the display unit 50a, while making the timer represented by the time presentation image G90 appear to be broken (buggy), thereby executing the jackpot special presentation.

While the special jackpot effect is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 121 continues to measure the consecutive win elapsed time using the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128. Since the performance time of the special jackpot effect is set to 10 seconds, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the special jackpot effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a command (first time performance resume command) indicating the resumption of the time performance including the consecutive win elapsed time indicated by the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128 at that time in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the first time performance resume command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 changes the consecutive winning streak elapsed time indicated by the time performance image G90 on the display unit 50a to the consecutive winning streak elapsed time indicated by the first time performance resume command, and returns the display mode of the time performance image G90 to the original normal mode, thereby resuming the time performance.

Next, the interruption of the time presentation due to the second interruption mode will be described. The interruption of the time presentation due to the second interruption mode is caused by the cessation of the operation of firing the game ball. When the operation of firing the game ball is stopped during a period other than the period during which a round of play is being played, specifically, when the handle 72k is not being touched, the time presentation image G90 is hidden.

The time presentation interrupted by the second interruption mode resumes when the situation is such that the game ball launch operation is deemed to have resumed, specifically, when the handle 72k is contacted again. Strictly speaking, the fact that the handle 72k is contacted again does not necessarily constitute the resumption of the game ball launch operation, but in the fifth embodiment, it is deemed to be the resumption of the game ball launch operation. The time presentation interrupted by the second interruption mode resumes with the elapsed consecutive game time when it was interrupted. In other words, the elapsed consecutive game time represented by the time presentation (time presentation image G90) when interrupted by the second interruption mode is the same as the elapsed consecutive game time represented by the time presentation (time presentation image G90) when it is resumed.

During the 1 ms timer interrupt process of step S4011 during a period other than the period from when the round number designation command indicating the first round of play is received until the ending command for the jackpot game is received, in other words, during a period other than the period during which round play is being played, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF, i.e., whether the handle 72k has changed from a contacted state to a untouched state (whether the operation of firing the game balls has stopped) and whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON, i.e., whether the handle 72k has changed from a untouched state to a contacted state (whether the operation of firing the game balls has resumed).

Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the launch operation of the game ball has stopped, if the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 is measuring the consecutive game elapsed time, it interrupts the measurement. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 pauses the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 at the consecutive game elapsed time at that time. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a command (second interruption mode interruption command) indicating that the time performance is to be interrupted in the second interruption mode (time performance image G90 is not displayed) in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

When the second interruption mode interruption command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 makes the time performance image G90 invisible on the display unit 50a.

When the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines that the launch operation of the game balls has resumed, if the measurement of the consecutive game elapsed time by the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 has been paused, the measurement is cancelled, i.e., resumed. Specifically, the presentation control microcomputer 121 restarts the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 from the consecutive game elapsed time at that time. Furthermore, the presentation control microcomputer 121 sets in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124 a command (second time presentation resume command) indicating that the display of the time presentation image G90 including the consecutive game elapsed time at that time, i.e., the consecutive game elapsed time when the measurement of the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 was paused, should be resumed.

When the second time performance resume command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 resumes displaying the time performance image G90 on the display unit 50a at the elapsed time of consecutive wins indicated by the second time performance resume command, and resumes the time performance on the time performance image G90.

Next, the interruption of the time presentation due to the third interruption mode will be described. The interruption of the time presentation due to the third interruption mode is caused by the execution of the consecutive win result presentation related to the special revival jackpot variation. In the special chart variation presentation related to the special revival jackpot variation, the time presentation image G90 is hidden from immediately before the consecutive win result presentation starts until the revival presentation starts.

The time from when the consecutive winning streak result presentation starts to when the revival presentation starts is set to 7 seconds (5 seconds for the consecutive winning streak result presentation + 2 seconds for the temporary stop display of the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3). Therefore, the time presentation interrupted by the third interruption mode resumes when 7 seconds have passed since the interruption began. The time presentation interrupted by the third interruption mode resumes so that the interrupted time is corrected. In other words, the consecutive winning streak elapsed time shown by the time presentation (time presentation image G90) when interrupted by the third interruption mode is different from the consecutive winning streak elapsed time shown by the time presentation (time presentation image G90) when resumed. In detail, the value obtained by subtracting the consecutive winning streak elapsed time shown by the time presentation (time presentation image G90) when interrupted by the third interruption mode from the consecutive winning streak elapsed time shown by the time presentation (time presentation image G90) when resumed is the interrupted time.

And in the special chart change presentation related to the special revival jackpot variation, just as in the case of the special failure variation, the time presentation image G90 is erased (displayed) immediately before the consecutive win result presentation starts. However, in the case of the special failure variation, the time presentation ends as a result of the time presentation image G90 being erased, whereas in the case of the special revival jackpot variation, the time presentation image G90 is displayed in response to the start of the revival presentation, and the time presentation resumes. In other words, in the case of the special revival jackpot variation, the time presentation is interrupted by being hidden.

As mentioned above, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the consecutive winnings elapsed time command during consecutive winnings result presentation in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 when 10 seconds (7 seconds until the win/lose turning point + 3 seconds of the miss indication presentation) have elapsed since the start of the special chart variation presentation related to the special revival jackpot variation. However, when the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the consecutive winnings elapsed time command during consecutive winnings result presentation in the special chart variation presentation based on the special revival jackpot variation, it does not reset the consecutive winnings elapsed time timer 128 and continues to measure the consecutive winnings elapsed time.

When the consecutive win result presentation time elapsed command set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 makes the time presentation image G90 invisible on the display unit 50a.

The performance control microcomputer 121 also continues to measure the consecutive win elapsed time using the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128 while the special chart change performance related to the special revival jackpot change is being executed, and when 17 seconds (7 seconds until the win/lose turning point + 3 seconds for the miss indication performance + 5 seconds for the consecutive win result performance + 2 seconds for the temporary stop display of the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3) have elapsed since the start of the special chart change performance related to the special revival jackpot change, it sets a command (third time performance resume command) indicating that the display of the time performance image G90 including the consecutive win elapsed time indicated by the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128 at that time should be resumed in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

When the third time performance resume command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command sending process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 resumes displaying the time performance image G90 on the display unit 50a at the elapsed time of consecutive wins indicated by the third time performance resume command, and resumes the time performance on the time performance image G90.

Next, a specific example of the time presentation will be described using Figures 102 to 109. In this specific example, it is assumed that the game proceeds as follows. This specific example starts from the ending of the first jackpot game. Then, the game enters a time-saving state upon the end of the first jackpot game. In other words, a consecutive win game begins. In this time-saving state, a special chart change presentation related to a special normal jackpot change is executed. In this special chart change presentation, the time presentation is not interrupted, and the time presentation is performed normally. Then, the special chart 2 variable display related to the special normal jackpot change ends, a small jackpot game is executed, a V is won, and a third jackpot game is executed. In response to the end of the third jackpot game, the game enters a time-saving state, and in this time-saving state, a special chart change presentation related to a special normal jackpot change is executed again. In this special chart change presentation, the time presentation is interrupted by the jackpot special presentation (the time presentation is interrupted in the first interruption mode). Then, the special chart 2 variable display related to the special normal jackpot variation ends, a small jackpot game is played, a V is won, and a third jackpot game is played. The time-saving state is entered according to the end of the third jackpot game, and in the time-saving state, a special chart variation performance related to a special revival jackpot variation is played. In this special chart variation performance, for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the special chart variation performance started, the output (contact detection signal) from the touch switch 72a goes from ON to OFF, and when 3 seconds have passed since then, the output (contact detection signal) from the touch switch 72a goes from OFF to ON. That is, the launch operation of the game ball stops for 3 seconds after 2 seconds have passed since the special chart variation performance started. As a result, while the launch operation of the game ball is stopped, the time performance is interrupted by non-display (the time performance is interrupted in the second interruption mode). In addition, since it is a special revival jackpot variation, the time performance is interrupted by non-display from the start of the consecutive win result performance to the start of the revival performance (the time performance is interrupted in the third interruption mode). Then, the special chart 2 variable display related to the special revival jackpot variation ends, a small jackpot game is played, a V is won, and the third jackpot game is played. Upon the end of the third jackpot game, the game enters a time-saving state, and in this time-saving state, a special chart variation performance related to a special miss variation is played. When the special chart 2 variable display related to a special miss variation is played, the game enters a normal game state, and the consecutive wins end. In this special chart variation performance, the time performance ends when the consecutive win result performance is played.

For example, as shown in FIG. 102(A), when the ending of the first jackpot game is being played, the game transitions to a time-saving state when the ending ends. When the game transitions to the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the display unit 50a displays a background image for special effects, and displays the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are stopped to indicate a jackpot related to the first jackpot game. Then, when the first jackpot game executed based on the variable display of special symbols in this normal game state ends and the game transitions to the time-saving state, in other words, when the consecutive wins start, the time effect image G90 is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the time effect begins. As soon as the time effect image G90 is displayed, the elapsed time of the consecutive wins displayed in the time effect image G90 begins to be updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 102(C), assume that four seconds have passed since the transition to the time-saving state, and the second starting hole 12 is won, starting the special symbol 2 variable display. As explained in the specific example above, the special symbol 2 variation pattern for the first special symbol 2 variable display in this consecutive win is a special normal jackpot variation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 102(C) to FIG. 102(E), the display unit 50a displays the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner that progresses as the special performance progresses and ultimately indicates a jackpot. And since it is assumed that the time performance is performed normally in this special symbol 2 variable display, the consecutive win elapsed time displayed in the time performance image G90 continues to be updated appropriately as time passes.

Next, a small win game is played, a V is won in the small win game, and a third big win game is played. In the display unit 50a, effects corresponding to the small win game and the third big win game are appropriately played. During this time, as shown in Figures 103(A) to 103(D), the elapsed consecutive win time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be appropriately updated as time passes.

When the third jackpot game ends, the game moves to a time-saving state, and the special chart 2 variable display is performed in the time-saving state, but the special chart 2 change pattern for the second special chart 2 variable display in this consecutive win is a special normal jackpot change. However, in this specific example, a jackpot special effect is executed in the special chart change effect for the special normal jackpot change. Therefore, as shown in Figures 104 (A) to 104 (B), the special chart change effect for the second special chart 2 variable display in the consecutive win is started, and the consecutive win elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 is appropriately updated as time passes, and when one second has passed since the start of the special chart change effect, the jackpot special effect starts. Specifically, as shown in Figure 104 (C), the consecutive win elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 becomes "00:00:00:00" and the update stops, and the display mode of the time effect image G90 changes from the normal mode to a special mode in which the timer represented by the time effect image G90 is broken.

The special big win effect lasts for 10 seconds, so as shown in FIG. 104(D), when 10 seconds have passed since the special big win effect started, the special big win effect ends and the time effect resumes. Specifically, the display mode of the time effect image G90 returns to the normal mode, and the consecutive win elapsed time is updated. Here, while the updating of the consecutive win elapsed time in the time effect image G90 due to the special big win effect is stopped, the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128 of the effect control microcomputer 121 continues to measure the consecutive win elapsed time, so when the time effect resumes, the consecutive win elapsed time shown in the time effect image G90 is corrected (corrected) to the actual (regular) consecutive win elapsed time, and then the update resumes. In other words, the time during which the update was stopped is added to the consecutive win elapsed time shown in the time effect image G90.

Note that while the updating of the consecutive winning time in the time presentation image G90 due to the jackpot special presentation is stopped, the special presentation on the display unit 50a will proceed as if the pause had not occurred. Then, after the time presentation is resumed, as shown in Figures 104(E) to 104(F), the special presentation will proceed on the display unit 50a, and ultimately the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3, which indicate a jackpot, will be displayed as stopped, but during this time, the consecutive winning time displayed on the time presentation image G90 will continue to be updated appropriately as time passes.

After the situation shown in Fig. 104(F), a small win game is played, a V is won in the small win game, and a third big win game is played, but on the display unit 50a, effects corresponding to the small win game and the third big win game are played. During this time, as shown in Fig. 105(A) to Fig. 105(G), the consecutive winning time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be appropriately updated as time passes. It should be noted that, in fact, during this round play, there is a period of time when the player takes his hands off the handle 72k and the operation of shooting the game balls is stopped. However, as mentioned above, when the output state of the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF, the time presentation is interrupted; more specifically, the time presentation image G90 is hidden, and the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive wins by the consecutive wins elapsed time timer 128 of the presentation control microcomputer 121 is interrupted during periods other than when a round of play is being played. Therefore, here, as shown in Figures 105(D) to 105(F), the consecutive wins elapsed time displayed in the time presentation image G90 continues to be updated appropriately as time passes, even during the time period when the output state of the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF and the release of game balls has not been stopped.

When the second third jackpot game in the consecutive wins ends, the game transitions to a time-saving state, and the special chart 2 variable display is performed in the time-saving state, but the special chart 2 variation pattern related to the third special chart 2 variable display in this consecutive win is assumed to be a special revival jackpot variation. Furthermore, in this specific example, it is assumed that the output from the touch switch 72a goes from ON to OFF when two seconds have passed since the special chart variation performance related to the special normal jackpot variation started, and the output from the touch switch 72a goes from OFF to ON when three seconds have passed since then. Therefore, as shown in Figures 106(A) to 106(B), the special chart variation performance related to the third special chart 2 variable display in the consecutive wins starts, and while the consecutive win elapsed time displayed in the time performance image G90 continues to be appropriately updated according to the passage of time, when two seconds have passed since the special chart variation performance started, the time performance image G90 is hidden and the time performance is interrupted, as shown in Figure 106(C). In addition, while the output from the touch switch 72a is OFF, the measurement of the consecutive win elapsed time by the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128 of the performance control microcomputer 121 is suspended.

Then, when three seconds have passed since the output from the touch switch 72a turned OFF, the output from the touch switch 72a turns from OFF to ON, and the time presentation image G90 is displayed and the time presentation resumes, as shown in FIG. 106(D). However, since the measurement of the consecutive winning time by the consecutive winning time timer 128 of the presentation control microcomputer 121 has also been suspended, when the time presentation resumes, it resumes with the consecutive winning time represented by the time presentation image G90 being the consecutive winning time when the time presentation image G90 became invisible.

After the time presentation resumes, as shown in Figures 106 (E) to 107 (A), the special presentation progresses on the display unit 50a, and during this time, the consecutive win elapsed time displayed on the time presentation image G90 continues to be updated appropriately as time passes. However, since the special chart change presentation related to the special revival jackpot change is being executed, when 10 seconds have passed since the special chart change presentation started, as shown in Figure 107 (B), the time presentation image G90 is hidden and the time presentation is interrupted, and the consecutive win result presentation image G91 is displayed in the center of the display unit 50a and the consecutive win result presentation is executed.

In the special chart change presentation related to the special revival jackpot change, when the consecutive win result presentation ends, as in the case of the special miss change, the first normal background image G111 is displayed and the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss, are displayed, as shown in FIG. 107(C). At this time, the time presentation image G90 is also hidden and the time presentation is interrupted.

When two seconds have passed since the consecutive win result presentation ended, a revival presentation is executed to notify the player that it was actually a small win (effectively a big win), as shown in FIG. 107 (D). Then, when this revival presentation starts, the time presentation resumes. Specifically, the time presentation image G90 is displayed, and the consecutive win elapsed time in the time presentation image G90 is updated. Note that while the time presentation image G90 due to the consecutive win result presentation or the like is not displayed, the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128 of the presentation control microcomputer 121 continues to measure the consecutive win elapsed time, so when the time presentation resumes, the consecutive win elapsed time shown by the time presentation image G90 is corrected (amended) to the actual (regular) consecutive win elapsed time, and then the update resumes. In other words, the time during which the update was not displayed is added to the consecutive win elapsed time shown by the time presentation image G90.

Then, after the time presentation resumes, as shown in Figures 107(D) to 107(E), the revival presentation progresses on the display unit 50a, and the presentation patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a stopped state, ultimately indicating a jackpot. During this time, the elapsed time of the consecutive wins displayed in the time presentation image G90 continues to be updated appropriately as time passes.

After the situation shown in FIG. 107(E), a small win game is played, a V is won in the small win game, and a third big win game is played, but on the display unit 50a, effects corresponding to the small win game and the third big win game are played. During this time, as shown in FIG. 108(A) to FIG. 108(D), the consecutive winning time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be updated appropriately as time passes.

When the third jackpot game in the consecutive wins ends, the game transitions to a time-saving state, and the special chart 2 variable display is performed in the time-saving state, but the special chart 2 variation pattern for the fourth special chart 2 variable display in this consecutive win is assumed to be a special miss variation. Therefore, as shown in Figures 109(A) to 109(B), from the start of the special chart variation performance for the fourth special chart 2 variable display in the consecutive wins until the consecutive win result performance is executed, the consecutive win elapsed time displayed in the time performance image G90 continues to be appropriately updated according to the passage of time. Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the special chart variation performance, the time performance image G90 is hidden and the time performance ends, and the consecutive win result performance image G91 is displayed in the center of the display unit 50a, and the consecutive win result performance is executed, as shown in Figure 109(C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 109(D), the first normal background image G111 is displayed, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss, and as shown in FIG. 109(E), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed stopped, the game transitions to normal gaming mode, and the consecutive wins end. Then, in response to the end of the consecutive wins, for example, as shown in FIG. 109(E), a left hit image G93 is displayed to notify a left hit according to the normal gaming mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY5, the performance control microcomputer 121 (performance execution means) that executes the performance can execute a time performance that measures the elapsed time of a consecutive win (a specific gaming state advantageous to the player), and if a specific condition is met while the time performance is being executed, the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive win may be interrupted, improving the accuracy of the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive win, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the time performance and increasing the interest in the game. Also, since the specific condition for interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive win includes the operation of firing game balls not being performed, the elapsed time of the consecutive win more accurately reflects the game time of the player, thereby further enhancing the performance effect of the time performance and increasing the interest in the game. Furthermore, if a specific condition is met during the execution of the time presentation in the big win game state (a special game state in which game balls can easily enter the big winning holes 14 and 15), the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive wins is not interrupted, so the elapsed time of the consecutive wins more accurately reflects the player's playing time, further enhancing the presentation effect of the time presentation and increasing interest in the game.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY5, the performance control microcomputer 121 (performance execution means for executing the performance) measures the elapsed time of consecutive wins (a specific game state advantageous to the player) and can execute a time performance in which the numerical value of the time performance image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is updated and displayed on the display unit 50a according to the elapsed time, and since the update of the numerical value of the numerical image may be interrupted during the execution of the time performance, the player can be drawn to the time performance image G90, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the time performance and increasing the interest in the game. In addition, the interruption of the update of the numerical value of the time performance image G90 (predetermined numerical image) in the time performance includes stopping the update of the numerical value of the time performance image G90 (predetermined numerical image) and not displaying the time performance image G90 (predetermined numerical image), which further enhances the performance effect of the time performance and increases the interest in the game. Furthermore, if a special big win effect is executed during the execution of the time effect (if the first condition is met), the updating of the values in the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is stopped, whereas if the game ball release operation is stopped or a consecutive win result effect is executed (if the second condition is met), the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is hidden. This provides a clear distinction between the interruptions in updating the values in the numerical image, thereby minimizing the decline in the effect of the time effect.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY5, the presentation control microcomputer 121 (presentation execution means for executing the presentation) measures the elapsed time of a consecutive win (a specific game state advantageous to the player) and is capable of executing a time presentation in which the numerical value of the time presentation image G90 (a specified numerical image) is updated according to the elapsed time of the consecutive win and displayed on the display unit 50a; while the time presentation is being executed, the updating of the numerical value of the time presentation image G90 (a specified numerical image) may be interrupted without interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive win, so that the player can be surprised when the time presentation is resumed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the time presentation and increasing interest in the game. In addition, during the execution of a time performance, the performance control microcomputer 121 (performance execution means for executing a performance) sometimes suspends the updating of the numerical values of the time performance image G90 (predetermined numerical image) without interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive wins, and sometimes suspends the updating of the numerical values of the time performance image G90 (predetermined numerical image) while interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive wins. This gives a clear distinction between the interruptions in the updating of the numerical values of the time performance image G90, thereby minimizing the decline in the performance effect of the time performance. Furthermore, when a special big win effect is executed during the execution of a time effect (when the first condition is met), the effect control microcomputer 121 (effect execution means for executing effects) suspends the updating of the values in the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) without suspending the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive wins, whereas when the game ball launch operation is stopped (when the second condition is met), the measurement of the elapsed time of the consecutive wins is suspended and the updating of the values in the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is suspended. This means that the elapsed time more accurately reflects the player's playing time, further enhancing the effect of the time effect and increasing the interest in the game.

(Modification of the fifth embodiment)
Next, modified examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. Note that the modified examples described below can be appropriately combined with each other.

The update of the consecutive winning time in the time presentation starts when the time-saving state is entered, but this start timing is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate, for example, at the start of the jackpot game before the time-saving state or at the start of the variable display of special chart 2 in the time-saving state.

The time presentation is interrupted by the special jackpot presentation, but the same presentation content may also be used to interrupt the time presentation in the special chart change presentation related to a miss. In other words, the update of the consecutive winning time in the time presentation image G90 may be stopped as a presentation that suggests that a jackpot game state may be reached, in other words, as a presentation that, when executed, increases the chance of transitioning to a jackpot game state. In this case, the longer the stop time, the higher the possibility of entering a jackpot game state.

Alternatively, from the perspective of so-called "ball output performance" and the game state to which the player transitions after the end of a jackpot game, there are jackpot games that are relatively advantageous to the player and jackpot games that are relatively disadvantageous to the player, and in a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, the time presentation may be interrupted like a special jackpot presentation with a predetermined probability to notify the player that it is an advantageous jackpot game. Alternatively, in both a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player and a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player, the time presentation may be interrupted like a special jackpot presentation, and this execution may increase the chances that a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is being played.

In addition, the update of the consecutive winning time elapsed in the time effect image G90 related to the jackpot special effect may be stopped at the time elapsed when the jackpot special effect started. Alternatively, the time effect image G90 may be hidden as the jackpot special effect.

Furthermore, when a time presentation that was interrupted by a special big win presentation is resumed, it may be resumed at the elapsed time of consecutive wins at the start of the interruption, just as in the case where the release of the game balls is stopped (the output from the touch switch 72a is changed from ON to OFF). In other words, while the special big win presentation is being executed, the measurement of the elapsed time of consecutive wins by the elapsed time of consecutive wins timer 128 of the presentation control microcomputer 121 may be suspended.

When the output from the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF, the time presentation is interrupted by hiding the time presentation image G90. In this case, the interruption mode may be such that the time presentation image G90 is displayed, but the consecutive winning time represented by the time presentation image G90 is stopped at the time when it changed from ON to OFF. In this case, the time presentation may be resumed by restarting the update from the consecutive winning time that was stopped when the output from the touch switch 72a changes from OFF to ON.

Furthermore, when the interrupted time presentation is resumed by the output from the touch switch 72a changing from ON to OFF, the presentation may be resumed so that the time during the interruption is added up, as in the case of the special big win presentation. In other words, while the output from the touch switch 72a is OFF, the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128 of the presentation control microcomputer 121 may continue to measure the consecutive win elapsed time.

When the consecutive winning result performance is executed, the time performance image G90 is hidden as an interruption of the time performance. In this case, the interruption mode may be such that the time performance image G90 is displayed, but the consecutive winning result time represented by the time performance image G90 is stopped as it was at the start of the consecutive winning result performance. In this case, even if the time performance ends in a special losing variation, the time performance image G90 may be displayed in the same way while the consecutive winning result performance is being executed. And, for example, when the special chart 2 stop display indicating a loss is performed, the time performance image G90 may be erased and the time performance may end. Alternatively, in the case of a special losing variation, the time performance may end at the timing when the consecutive winning result performance ends, and in the case of a special revival big win variation, the time performance may continue even if the consecutive winning result performance ends. Note that, when the time performance image G90 is displayed while the consecutive winning result performance is being executed, the consecutive winning result performance display content may not include the consecutive winning elapsed time.

In addition, the time presentation that was interrupted by the consecutive win result presentation will resume when the revival presentation starts, but the timing of this resumption is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate, for example, to the timing when the consecutive win result presentation ends.

Furthermore, when the time presentation that was interrupted by the consecutive win result presentation is resumed, it may be resumed with the consecutive win elapsed time at the start of the interruption, just as in the case where the release of the game balls is stopped (the output from the touch switch 72a is changed from ON to OFF). In other words, while the consecutive win result presentation is being executed, the measurement of the consecutive win elapsed time by the consecutive win elapsed time timer 128 of the presentation control microcomputer 121 may be suspended.

Although the output from touch switch 72a being turned OFF is considered to be the cessation of the launch of game balls, the method of detecting the cessation of the launch of game balls is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the output of the launch volume knob 72b becoming "0" may be considered to be the cessation of the launch of game balls and the interruption of the time presentation. Alternatively, a sensor capable of detecting game balls may be provided in the launch area 7, and the cessation of the launch of game balls may be considered to be the interruption of the time presentation when the sensor does not detect a game ball for a predetermined period of time.

During a period other than the period during which the round game is being played, it is determined whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF and whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON, but this period is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, during a period other than the entire jackpot game including the opening, round game, and ending, it may be determined whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF and whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON. Alternatively, during a period other than the small jackpot game and the jackpot game, it may be determined whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF and whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON.

The elapsed time of consecutive wins is measured by the performance control board 120, but the elapsed time of consecutive wins may also be measured by the image control board 140.

The type of special chart 2 change pattern in the time-saving state, the time related to the special chart 2 change pattern in the time-saving state, the probability of winning a small jackpot, the upper limit of the number of reserved special charts 2, the type of jackpot, the components of the jackpot game, and the type of game state to transition to upon the end of the jackpot game are not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

The consecutive wins end when the special chart 2 variable display related to a miss is executed in the time-saving state and the game moves to the normal game state, but the trigger for the end of the consecutive wins may be changed as appropriate. For example, after the big win game based on the big win in the second big win judgment, there is a time-saving state and a time-saving state, and the consecutive wins may end when the game moves to the normal game state. In this case, in the round game, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests whether the consecutive wins will continue or end, like a special effect, and for example, in the last round game, when the time-saving state is entered, an effect that suggests the consecutive wins will continue is executed, while when the game moves to the normal game state, an effect that suggests the consecutive wins will end is executed, and the consecutive wins result effect is executed at the ending. However, even in such a case, when the time-saving state is entered, an effect that suggests the consecutive wins will end is executed in the last round game, and the consecutive wins result effect is executed at the ending, but a revival effect may be executed at the end.

7. Other Modifications Next, other modifications of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment to the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment will be described below. Hereinafter, the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment to the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment will be referred to as the "pachinko gaming machine PY, etc."

In pachinko gaming machines such as PY, the display unit 50a is used to variably display the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in order to notify the results of the special drawing. However, instead of an image display device, a drum on which symbols are displayed may be provided as in a so-called "slot machine," and the results of the special drawing may be notified by variably displaying the drum.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines such as PY, the big prize opening 14 can be opened in a big win game, but a prize area that can be opened in a big win game other than the big prize opening 14 may also be provided.

In addition, in pachinko game machines such as PY, when a specific jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. In other words, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting conditions of the high probability state may be changed. For example, a second jackpot winning device that can be opened and closed and into which a game ball can enter when opened may be provided in a position in the game area 6 where the game ball can reach, separate from the jackpot winning device 14D, and when the second jackpot winning device is opened during a specific round of play during the jackpot game and the game ball that entered the second jackpot winning device passes through a specific area provided downstream of the second jackpot winning device, the high probability state may be set with the end of the jackpot game.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second large prize winning device opens for a time when it is easy to win (e.g., 29.5 seconds), and a non-specific jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that the second large prize winning device opens for a time when it is difficult to win (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In addition, there are specific and non-specific areas that a game ball that has won the second large prize winning device can pass through, and a distribution device is provided that distributes game balls to the specific and non-specific areas. Then, although the opening time of the second large prize winning device is the same, it is also possible to provide jackpot patterns that make it easy to set a high probability state and jackpot patterns that make it difficult to set a high probability state by combining the opening mode of the second large prize winning device and the operating mode of the distribution device.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines such as PY, the game control board 100 performs basic control over the progress of the game, and the presentation control board 120 performs basic control over the progress of the presentation according to the progress of the game (game control), so that game control and presentation control are performed on different boards, but they may also be configured to be performed on a single board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in that single board, or may be provided separately from that single board.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to other pinball gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and mahjong ball gaming machines, as well as reel-type gaming machines (so-called "slot machines").

8. Inventions Disclosed in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions A to G have been disclosed up to the previous paragraph in this [Mode for carrying out the invention]. In the description of inventions A to G, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned modes for carrying out the inventions and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to these additions. Note that invention A is a general term for inventions A1 to A3 below, invention B is a general term for inventions B1 to B3 below, invention C is a general term for inventions C1 to C3 below, invention D is a general term for inventions D1 to D3 below, invention E is a general term for inventions E1 to E3 below, invention F is a general term for inventions F1 to F3 below, and invention G is a general term for inventions G1 to G3 below.

In addition, according to the invention A, the gaming machine described in JP 2022-059249 A has the effect of increasing the interest in gaming, as described below in Problem 1. In the gaming machine described in JP 2022-059249 A, when a predetermined condition is met, such as a gaming ball entering a starting hole, a variable display of a special symbol is executed. After the variable display of the special symbol is executed, a stationary display of the special symbol is executed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stationary displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, a specific effect may be executed that suggests that an advantageous gaming state may be entered, and further, before the execution of the specific effect, a premonition effect that suggests that the specific effect will be executed may be executed. However, there is still room for improvement in order to increase the interest in gaming, with respect to a gaming machine that can execute a premonition effect that suggests that the specific effect will be executed before the execution of a specific effect that suggests that an advantageous gaming state may be entered. Therefore, the first problem is to provide a new gaming machine that increases the interest in gaming.

In addition, according to inventions B, E, F, and G, the gaming machine described in JP 2022-059249 A has the effect of increasing interest in gaming, as described below in Problem 2. In the gaming machine described in JP 2022-059249 A, when a predetermined condition is met, such as a gaming ball entering a starting hole, a variable display of a special symbol is executed. After the variable display of the special symbol is executed, a stationary display of the special symbol is executed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stationary displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, a specific image may be displayed on the display unit. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of displaying specific images on the display unit in order to increase interest in gaming. Therefore, Problem 2 is to provide a new gaming machine that increases interest in gaming.

Furthermore, according to invention C, the gaming machine described in JP 2019-181255 A has the effect of increasing interest in gaming, as described below in Problem 3. In the gaming machine described in JP 2019-181255 A, when a predetermined condition is met, such as a gaming ball entering a starting hole, a variable display of a special symbol is executed. After the variable display of the special symbol is executed, a stationary display of the special symbol is executed. Here, when a specific special symbol is displayed stationary, the game may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, a specific effect may be executed that suggests that an advantageous gaming state may be entered, and in the specific effect, multiple unit effects are executed consecutively. However, there is still room for improvement in order to increase interest in gaming machines that can execute specific effects in which multiple unit effects are executed consecutively. Therefore, the third problem is to provide a new gaming machine that increases interest in gaming.

In addition, according to invention D, the gaming machine described in JP 2022-059249 A has the effect of increasing interest in gaming, as described below in Problem 4. In the gaming machine described in JP 2022-059249 A, when a predetermined condition is met, such as a gaming ball entering a starting hole, a variable display of a special symbol is executed. After the variable display of the special symbol is executed, a stationary display of the special symbol is executed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stationary displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, various effects are executed during the game, and the specifications of specific items related to the effects can be changed. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines in which the specifications of specific items related to the effects can be changed in order to increase interest in the game. Therefore, Problem 4 is to provide a new gaming machine that increases interest in the game.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to the invention A1 is
A game execution means (game control board 100) that can set a game state (jackpot game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to a player;
A performance execution means (performance control board 120, image control board 140) capable of executing a performance;
The performance execution means includes:
A specific performance (director performance) may be executed that suggests the possibility of the advantageous game state being reached.
Before executing the specific performance, a premonition performance (premonition performance) may be executed to suggest that the specific performance will be executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, if the specific performance is not executed after the premonition performance is executed, the possibility of the advantageous game state being achieved is higher than the possibility of not being achieved.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to the invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effects include a first specific effect (first specific effect) and a second specific effect (second specific effect) having a different effect pattern from the first specific effect.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to the invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A2,
The premonition effect may suggest that the first specific effect will be executed, or may suggest that the second specific effect will be executed, and in either case, the premonition effect is executed in substantially the same manner.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to the invention B1 comprises:
A game execution means (game control board 100) that can set a game state (jackpot game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to a player;
A performance execution means (performance control board 120, image control board 140) capable of executing a performance;
The performance execution means includes:
In the display unit, there are times when a specific image (a hold icon, the icon) is displayed at a first display position (a first special position) and times when the specific image is displayed at a second display position (a second special position),
A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is more likely to be achieved when the specific image is displayed at the second display position than when the specific image is displayed at the first display position.

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to the invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to the present invention,
The display position of the specific image is a normal display position (normal position),
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific image moves to the first display position when it is displayed at the normal display position, and the specific image moves to the second display position when it is displayed at the normal display position.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to the invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to Invention B1 or Invention B2,
The game execution means is capable of executing a judgment as to whether or not to enter the advantageous game state (jackpot judgment), and may enter the advantageous game state when it is judged that the advantageous game state should be entered in the judgment,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific image is an image that may be displayed at the normal display position upon the occurrence of the right to execute the judgment (special image 1 reservation).

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to the invention C1 comprises:
A game execution means (game control board 100) that can set a game state (jackpot game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to a player;
A performance execution means (performance control board 120, image control board 140) capable of executing a performance;
The performance execution means includes:
A specific effect (special mode effect) may be executed that suggests the possibility of the advantageous gaming state being reached.
In the specific performance, a plurality of types of unit performances (cut-in performance, group crossing performance, frame lamp flash) can be executed N times (3 times) consecutively, and the possibility of entering the advantageous game state is higher when the same type of unit performance is executed N times than when the same type of unit performance is executed N-1 times.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to the invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The unit performance includes a first unit performance (cut-in performance) and a second unit performance (group crossing performance),
A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is more likely to be achieved when either the first unit performance or the second unit performance is executed alone in the specific performance than when both the first unit performance and the second unit performance are executed together in the specific performance.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to the invention C3 comprises:
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The unit performance includes a first unit performance (cut-in performance) and a second unit performance,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is more likely to be achieved when the second unit performance (group crossing performance) is executed N times in the specific performance than when the first unit performance is executed N times in the specific performance.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to the invention D1 is
A performance execution means (performance control board 120) capable of executing a performance is provided,
As the specifications of the specific items related to the performance (the first performance specific item to the fifth performance specific item), there are a default first specification (default state) and a second specification (customized state) different from the first specification,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the specification of the specific item is set to the second specification, the performance execution means is capable of executing a specific display (in-play custom operation image G80) on the display unit, which asks about continuing the setting of the second specification.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to the invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention D1,
The game control board 100 further includes a game execution means that can execute variable display of identification information (special symbol) when a predetermined condition (winning into the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12) is met, and can execute a specific game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player when a specific result (jackpot symbol) is derived from the variable display of the identification information.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance execution means may execute the specific display when the specified condition is met and the variable display of the identification information is executed in a non-play state (waiting for customers) in which the specific game is not being executed, and the variable display of the identification information is executed.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to the invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention D2,
The game device further includes an operation means (a cross button 40k, a first effect button 41k) that can be operated by a player,
In the non-play state, the specification of the specific item can be changed from the first specification to the second specification by operating the operating means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specifications of the specific item are changed from the first specifications to the second specifications in the non-play state, the specific display is not executed in the variable display of the identification information executed when the specified condition is satisfied in the non-play state, but the specific display may be executed in the variable display of the identification information executed when the specified condition is satisfied in the next non-play state that occurs.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to the invention E1 is
A game control means (game control board 100) capable of creating a specific game state (a consecutive win) advantageous to a player;
A performance execution means (performance control board 120, image control board 140) that executes a performance using a performance means including a predetermined display means (display unit 50a),
The performance execution means includes:
A time effect (time effect) for measuring the elapsed time of the specific game state can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific condition is met during execution of the time presentation, measurement of the elapsed time may be interrupted.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to the invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E1,
The machine further includes an operating means (handle 72k) that allows a player to operate the launching of the game ball;
The gaming machine, characterized in that the specific condition is that the firing operation is not performed.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to the invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E2,
The machine further includes winning openings (first large winning opening 14, second large winning opening 15) into which game balls can enter,
The specific game state includes a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a game ball is easily allowed to enter the winning hole,
The effect execution means may not interrupt measurement of the elapsed time if the specific condition is met during execution of the time effect in the special game state.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to the invention F1 comprises:
A game control means (game control board 100) capable of creating a specific game state (a consecutive win) advantageous to a player;
A performance execution means for executing a performance using a performance means including a predetermined display means (display unit 50a) (performance control board 120, image control board 140),
The performance execution means includes:
The elapsed time of the specific game state is measured, and a time effect (time effect) is executed in which the numerical value of a predetermined numerical image (time effect image G90) is updated and displayed on the display means according to the elapsed time.
A gaming machine characterized in that updating of the numerical values of the numerical image may be interrupted during execution of the time presentation.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to the invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F1,
The effect execution means includes a means for stopping updating of the numerical value of the numerical image and a means for hiding the numerical image during execution of the time effect.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to the invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F2,
The effect execution means stops updating the numerical value of the numerical image when a first condition (execution of a special jackpot effect) is met during execution of the time effect, while making the numerical image invisible when a second condition (stopping of launching of game balls, execution of consecutive win result effect) is met.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The gaming machine according to the invention G1 is
A game control means (game control board 100) capable of creating a specific game state (a consecutive win) advantageous to a player;
A performance execution means for executing a performance using a performance means including a predetermined display means (display unit 50a) (performance control board 120, image control board 140),
The performance execution means includes:
The elapsed time of the specific game state is measured, and a time effect (time effect) is executed in which the numerical value of a predetermined numerical image (time effect image G90) is updated and displayed on the display means according to the elapsed time.
A gaming machine characterized in that, during execution of the time presentation, updating of the numerical values of the numerical image may be suspended without suspending measurement of the elapsed time.

8-7-2. Invention G2
The gaming machine according to the invention G2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention G1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means, during execution of the time effect, suspends updating of the numerical value of the numerical image without suspending measurement of the elapsed time, and suspends measurement of the elapsed time and suspends updating of the numerical value of the numerical image.

8-7-3. Invention G3
The gaming machine according to the invention G3 is
A gaming machine according to invention G2,
The effect execution means interrupts updating of the numerical value of the numerical image without interrupting measurement of the elapsed time when a first condition (execution of a special jackpot effect, execution of a consecutive win result effect) is met during execution of the time effect, while interrupting measurement of the elapsed time and interrupting updating of the numerical value of the numerical image when a second condition (stopping of the release of game balls) is met.

PY, PY1, PY2, PY3, PY4, PY5... Pachinko game machine 1... Game board 6... Game area 6A... Left game area 6B... Right game area 11... First start port 11a... First start port sensor 12... Second start port 12a... Second start port sensor 14... Large prize port 14a... Large prize port sensor 40... Cross button device 40k... Cross button 40ku... Upper operation unit 40kd... Lower operation unit 40kl... Left operation unit 40kr... Right operation unit 41... First performance button device 41k... First performance button 50... Image display device 50a... Display unit 52... Speaker 53... Frame lamp 72k... Handle 72a... Touch switch 100... Game control board 101... Game control microcomputer 120... Performance control board 128... Performance specific item memory unit, consecutive win elapsed time timer 121... Performance control microcomputer 140... Image control board

Claims (1)

A game control means capable of controlling a game;
A performance control means capable of controlling the performance,
The performance control means includes:
The game control means may execute a suggestion effect that suggests that a specific game state advantageous to a controllable player may be entered,
In the suggestion performance, a plurality of types of specific performances can be executed consecutively a first specific number of times, and the specific game state is more likely to be reached when the specific performance of the same type is executed the first specific number of times than when the specific performance is executed a second specific number of times which is one less than the first specific number of times.

Images